Home
        Luminex 100 IS User Manual. To be used only by Scott Placke.
         Contents
1.                                               Unknown 4                      B start  SlumnexicoIssoRware    7w analysis Fushat 99      Q3 EAS zm  Figure 5 20  Analysis Window   Samples Tab Open    Replicate  Averaging    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Standard and control replicates are predefined in the template  You  define unknown sample replicates in batch setup indicated by  replicate Sample ID     The data analysis function supports replicate sampling  It calculates  each sample as an individual sample  which is then averaged to  obtain a replicate average     e Standards tab    displays standard and control average values   e Samples tab   displays sample average values     Replicate averages are displayed with AVG in the Loc  location   column     The AVG entry appears immediately after the wells being averaged  or at the end of the list depending on what you select under Sort   Sequentially or Alphabetically      Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    If the system fails to determine the results for a replicate due to an  excessive skew of one of the samples  you can invalidate the out of  tolerance value  Use the Invalidate Standard  F4  or Invalidate  Control  F6  buttons at the bottom of the Analysis window  Be  aware that this fixes standards and controls  not patient sample  If  any of the replicate standards and or controls are invalidated  the     Avg    results reflects the average of the remaining standard and or  control replicates     
2.           llus  B 20  Install Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software                 B 20  Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Firmware Installation                   B 21  Firmware Upgrade Cable Configurations                 B 21  Luminex 100 Analyzer Firmware Upgrade               B 22  Connect Cable    0 0    0    cece eee eee B 22  Upgrade Firmware    B 22  Verify Successful Firmware Upgrade                B 23  Update Interface Cable                   0 000000  B 23  Luminex XYP Instrument Firmware Update              B 24  Update Firmware       0 0 0    0c eee eee ee B 24  Verify Successful Firmware Upgrade                B 24  Luminex SD System Firmware Update                  B 25  Update Firmware    1    0 0 0    e eee eee eee eee B 25  Verify Successful Firmware Upgrade                B 25  Network Installation Advisory           00 0    e eee eee ee B 26  Prepare System for First Use    0 0 0    2  cee eee eee B 26  Installation Drawing            0  cee eee B 27  Output C SV C 1  OVERVIEW   ia sse RR ee eb Ie GbR e dre par SR RN a C 1  Overall Desigti   2 40 0644 sabes ebbe ede de a C 1  Blank LINES    12 rere eom doe deo og o ae C 2  Field Definitions            lllleleeeeeleleeeen  C 2  Statistics Definitions             0    cece eee eee C 4  Statistics Column Definitions                 0 0 00008 C 5  Luminex 100 IS OUTPUT CSV file with no  additional features enabled                0    c eee eee eee C 7  Luminex 100 IS OUTPUT CSV file with all  additional features enabled             
3.          5 65  Managing Assay Lots           00    cece eee eee eee 5 71   Create a New Lot           0    0c c cee eee ee 5 71   Edit Lot Information on an Unused Template          5 73   Edit Lot Information on a Used Template             5 74   Import Lot to an Existing Template                   5 74   Export a Lot from an Existing Template              5 75  Analyzing Batches and Multi Batches                   5 76   Customize Data Analysis Settings                   5 77   Enable Automatic Analysis                 2  00   5 82   Analyze Processed Batch Data                      5 83   View Detailed Test Analysis                    00  5 83   Validating or Invalidating Standards and Controls       5 83   Change Dot    ies eee RERO RADAR ER 5 85  Running Reports and Analyses                   000005 5 86   Report Types 4  eee ee Re RP 5 86   Export Batch Data        0    0  eee eee eee 5 89   Print Data Analysis Report                   20005 5 89    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Contents    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Database Management Procedures                      5 90  Back Up the Database    eese  5 90   Delete Database Entries                    0 00   5 9    Restore Database Data                 0 00000 eee 5 91  Maintenance Procedures             00 0 0 e ee eee eee 5 92  Drain the Analyzer       0 0      eee eee eee 5 93   Run Self Diagnostics           0 0    c eee eee eee 5 94   Using the Cleanup Utility           lessen 5 94   
4.         3   Std l   3985   75            A   Std xI   31 76   75           5   Std xxI   1 2044    75             6   Low Control   58   75            7   Patient 1   430   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   371   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    StdDev         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1   Std s   1593 82742065973   75            2   Std m   211 690384143302   75            3   Std I   1270 33151408429   75            4    Std xI   4104 5788483744   75            5   Std xxl   4302 66591643698   75            6   Low Control   20 9703780785363   75            7   Patient 1   155 634790802404   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   4172 74723003512   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Trimmed Count         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology     1    Std s   69   75            2   Std m   69   75            3   Std I   69   75            A   Std xl   69   75            5   Std xxl    69   75            6   Low Control   69   75            7   Patient 1   69   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   69   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Trimmed Mean         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1   Std s   56 9855072463768   75            2   Std m   494 463768115942   75            3   Std     4466 08695652174   75           
5.        General   Bead Set  Plate Layout    Name            ss      s   sS   S      CsisCS  Description  La RR           Opeatr         DD Gate   Timeout  25 sec    0 HL    7500 to  15000           Sample size   5           Bead Events    100 regions        Per Bead C Total Beads  100    OK Cancel    Figure 5 35  Options Dialog Box   General Tab          3  Enter the Name  Description  and Operator information     4  Edit the following information as desired     Sample Size   use values from 20 to 200 uL  To avoid air  uptake  we recommend that your sample well contains at least  25 uL in addition to the sample size     DD Gate   use values within the range of 0 to 32767     Timeout   use values of 0 to 400  where 0   no timeout     5  Click the arrow down next to 100 regions to select the desired   bead map you want to view  The available bead maps are 25  50    64  and 100  default  regions  Select whether you want the Bead   Events results to be displayed as Per Bead or Total Beads  If   you select Total Beads  enter the number of total beads in the text   box      Select Per Bead to continue analyzing until each bead set has  met at least the minimum events as determined on the Bead  Set tab    Select Total Beads to continue analyzing until the selected  beads meet total beads value  Use Total Beads when you are  not using all of your selected bead sets in each well  Set the  total to desired high value     5 66 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Note  The leg
6.       1 10 100 1000 10000   7500 15000  Doublet Discriminator    p                1  Gate Boundaries 2  Aggregate Beads 3  Numerical Gate Position  Figure 5 13  Set DD Gate Example    The Histogram contains the Show Bead menu and four buttons       Autoscale    Zoom     Log Linear    Maximize    For more information on these commands  see the Commands  section beginning on page 5 31     The Dot Plot  or bead map  appears in the lower right section of the  Acquisition Detail tab  See Figure 5 14  The dot plot shows a  graphical display of real time data collection     Luminex recommends using the default settings to collect data  The  default axes are Classification 1 on the X axis and Classification 2 on  the Y axis  To see the dot plot  you must use the default axis  To  display the bead set information  hover the mouse pointer over the  desired region  You can change the X axis and Y axis of the dot plot  for troubleshooting purposes  although you should use the default  settings in all other scenarios     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    L1       belo          10000       1000       Classification 2  100       10                1 10 100 1000 10000  Classification 1    Figure 5 14  Dot Plot Display Example       Four buttons appear at the top of the frame to control the display       Density Decaying    Log Linear     Zoom     Maximize    You can toggle between two types of dot plots using the Density   Decaying button  The Decaying Dot Plot plots o
7.      1  On the Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract to eject the plate  holder     2  Insert the reservoir in the upper right corner of the plate holder   See Figure B 10         gt     Figure B 10 The XYP Instrument Reservoir    3  Click Eject Retract to retract the plate holder     Calibrate and Verify the Run system calibration  See Calibration Procedures  page 5 46  to  System complete the installation process by running the system calibrators  and controls     Install the SD System     To install the Luminex SD system     1  After performing system calibration and the pressure has  stabilized  select Prime from the Home or Maintenance tab   Then  at the Diagnostic tab  System Monitor section  record the  air and sheath pressure     Air pressure  psi   Sheath Pressure  psi     Save this information  You will need it later in the installation  procedure and also if you return to the original sheath fluid and  waster bottle configuration     2  Atthe end of the Prime cycle  disconnect the sheath fluid bottle   Store it in a safe place  If you plan to use the Luminex SD  system waste line  disconnect the waste bottle  Connect the  system waste line to the instrument and insert the end into a large  waste container     B  10 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Note  Do not place the Luminex  SD on top of the Luminex 100  Analyzer     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS System Setup    Place the Luminex SD system near the sheath fluid connection  on the lef
8.      After you power on the PC  Windows automatically starts up and  then the Luminex 100 IS software automatically starts up  Continue  with    Configure the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software  section     The first time the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software starts up  you have to  acknowledge the License  Read the agreement and click Accept to  continue     You must adjust the sample probe vertical height each time you  change the type or style of microtiter plate  Since this is a new  installation  you need to adjust the sample probe for your microtiter  plates  See Figure B 9              Lumit         1  Thumb Wheel 2  Height Adjustment Locking Screw  Figure B 9 Thumb Wheel and Height Adjustment Locking Screw      To adjust the sample probe vertical height     1  Remove the clear plastic shield that covers the sample probe  area     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Note  Alignment discs can be  placed in any well as long as  the well is designated in the  software     Luminex 100 IS System Setup    In a 96 well microtiter plate where overall height is no more than  0 75 inches  19 mm   place the appropriate alignment tool in the  plate     For a standard plate with flat bottom wells   stack two of the  larger  5 08 mm diameter  alignment discs together and place  them into the selected well     For a filter bottom plate   stack three of the larger  5 08 mm  diameter  alignment discs together and place them into the  selected well     For a half volume plate with flat b
9.     Figure 3 1 Back of the Luminex 100 Analyzer and Luminex XYP  Instrument    Fluidics    Sample Arm The sample arm transports the sample from the sample tube to the  cuvette  The carriage drops to the microtiter well for sample  retrieval     Luminex XYP A stainless steel sample probe acquires the sample  A shorter probe  Instrument Sample is provided for shipping and troubleshooting     Probe  Warning  During operation  this system contains exposed moving  parts that can result in a puncture hazard  Risk of personal injury    is present  Keep hands and fingers away from the sample probe   The shield should be in place        Cheminert   Fitting This fitting attaches the Luminex 100 analyzer sample arm tubing to  the sample arm  Disconnect this fitting when you remove the sample  probe  See Figure 3 2     3 8 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology The System    The alignment guide directs the sample probe into the Luminex XYP  instrument        1  Cheminert Fitting  2  Sample Arm   3  Luminex XYP Instrument Sample Probe  4  Shield   5  Alignment Guide    Figure 3 2 Cheminert Fitting    Access Doors The Luminex 100 analyzer has three access doors  Two of the access  doors are on the front  and the third 1s on the back  The front left  access door supplies access to the sheath filter  The front center  access door supplies access to the syringe  The rear access door  supplies access to the air intake filter  See Figure 3 3 and Figure 3 4     Luminex 9        1  Left doo
10.     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    The analyzer is misaligned with  the XYP instrument     The sample probe is bent     Troubleshooting    Reposition the Luminex 100  analyzer on top of the Luminex  XYP instrument so that the  holes match up correctly  The  alignment guide should tighten  and loosen fairly easily if the  instruments are aligned  correctly  Continue to square the  instruments until the guide  loosens and tightens easily     Remove the sample probe from  the Luminex 100 analyzer  Roll  it on a flat surface  If it does not  roll smoothly  replace it with a  new sample probe        Calibration and  Control Problems       Symptom    Possible problem    Solution       Calibration is slow or fails     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    The calibration microspheres  are not fully suspended     Wrong calibration lot number or  target values are entered in  Update CAL Targets dialog  box     The system calibrators are in the  wrong well on the plate     Not enough calibrator  microspheres added to the well     Calibrator lot is expired   The sample probe height is    incorrect     The sample probe is clogged     Vortex the calibration vials to  resuspend the microspheres     Verify that the correct lot  number and target values are  used  See page 5 46 for further  information     Verify that you placed the  calibrator into the correct well   See page 5 46     Make sure that you use four or  five drops of calibrator  microspheres to the well     Use a new bo
11.    Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software  page B 15      Software  Luminex 100 IS Version Overview of upgrade to Luminex IS 2 3 procedure   2 1 2 2 to Luminex 100 IS e Backup your Luminex 100 IS 2 1 or 2 2 database  Version 2 3 e Remove Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 or 2 2    e Install Luminex IS 2 3 software  e Verify successful upgrade     Backup Luminex     Important   Backup your database before you uninstall  100 IS 2 10r 2 2 Version 2 1 or 2 2 software   Database      To back up your Luminex 100 IS 2 1 or 2 2 database     1  On the Tools menu  click Database Backup  The Backup  Database To    dialog box opens  See Figure B 18      Backup Database To    Database To    2  x  Save in  ja Backup    FEM  Ex E3           mp Luminex 100 IS  E1 in  LX1001504232002 bak  History is  LX100I506112002 bak    E  Desktop          My Documents       My Computer  ao        L lt 1 001507032002 bak    we Save as type     Y   Cancel    My Network P       File name        Figure B 18 Backup Database To    Dialog Box    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C B 19    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Remove Luminex  100 IS 2 1 or 2 2    Note  During the Luminex  100 IS Version 2 1 or 2 2  software removal  error dialog  boxes may appear  They are  of no consequence to the  uninstall  Just click OK or Yes  in response and continue with  the uninstall     Install Luminex  100 IS 2 3  Software    2     xMAP Technology    Choose the file name and location of the database that you want  to back up and click Save  T
12.    instrument controls  assay calibrators  and assay controls  It records  acquisition and maintenance data in real time to minimize data loss  in case of system failure  Each batch file records the date and time   command cancellation  if applicable   and voltages used for the  commands performed during the batch     Back up the system database following the schedule set by your  laboratory  Your laboratory may require you to back the system up  weekly  daily  or after you complete each batch     If your laboratory has no schedule for database backups  the system    does inform you when your database approaches its size limit  You  should back up the database according to a periodic schedule     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Delete Database  Entries    Restore Database    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Data    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software        To back up the database     1  Onthe Tools menu  click Database Backup  The Backup  Database To dialog box opens     2  Choose the file name and location of the database that you want  to back up  The default name is LX100IS month date year      3  Click Save  The LX100 IS Database Backup dialog box opens  informing you the backup is in progress to the specified location     You can erase sample information from the database at any time  You  will see a warning when the database is 80  full  approximately 200  MB free of a two GB hard drive limit   This provides advanced  warning to erase database information    
13.    soccer QUE Santas sats 6 10  Asrequited   c  ciee e sick eei iae eI er dn ber eee d 6 11  BUSES crei ob teniente ein EE E e LR SEE d 6 11  Maintenance Log         sseeeeeeee e 6 13  Troubleshooting 7 1  Troubleshooting the Luminex 100 IS System                  7 1  Power Supply Problems          0 0 0 0    cece eee eee nee 7 2  Communication secesia ereh a a cette 7 2    vi PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Pressurization         lees n 7 3  lJunnab   i cq  7 4  Sample  Probe  acu ees ena epe nau ebbe dedere 7 5  Calibration and Control Problems                  200000 0 7 1  Acquisition Problems            0 0    cece cece eee eee 7 9  Bead Detail Irregularities         0    0  eee ee eee eee 7 10  Error States  Lio eue hee helen we aig nga 7 13  System Error Messages          leere 7 13  Sample Error Messages          lesen 7 15  Luminex SD Problems               0 000 cece eee eee 7 18  lul  Em 7 18  Malfunction eee ene me Re el oe n 7 18  Draining the Reservoir      0 0 0 0    7 18  Verificato   eco eoe eR eet hau ye Obie Lad dee 7 19  Product Numbers 8 1  Hardware slc Dee Xu br vue he  Pee E PY  8 1  SONWALE  iasi marai ese Gehan aie Gohan mwah yd ae ale byte i in dehy a 8 3  xMAP Reagents    eod ue ed aci RI Ra C Pues 8 3  TPAD ican PP  E 8 3  Glossary A 1  Luminex 100 IS System Installation B 1  OVEIVIEW i weddden ged b ERO E E Y Gr EA ER EORR e B 1  Luminex 100 IS System Setup                     0 000005 B 1  Connect the Luminex 100 analyzer and  Lu
14.    xMAP Technology    Photodiodes and a photomultiplier tube receive fluorescent signals  from xMAP microspheres  The Luminex 100 analyzer digitizes the  waveforms and delivers the signals to a digital signal processor   DSP   Proprietary algorithms function with the DSP to greatly  increase sensitivity     The xMAP microspheres are highly uniform  polystyrene particles  that have been crosslinked during polymerization for physical and  thermal stability  Varying amounts of fluorochromes embedded  within each xMAP microsphere give each xMAP microsphere set an  unique fluorescent signal  To ensure the stability of this signal  it is  essential to protect the microspheres from light  Follow the product  information sheet instructions for storage procedures for xMAP  microspheres and assay kits     Calibrator xMAP microspheres are used to normalize the settings for  the reporter channel  both classification channels and the doublet  discriminator channel for the Luminex 100 analyzer     The control xMAP microspheres are used to verify the calibration  and optical integrity of the system     This section provides a brief overview for using the Luminex 100 IS  2 3 software     With the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software  you work with assay kits  provided by a kit manufacturer  A template may be included with  each kit that is imported into the software  The template includes a  sequence of commands required for the assay     Once you select the template  you enter sample data into a  ba
15.   1    Std S   57   75            2   Std m   525   75            3   Std l   4341  75m        A   Std xI  1 431 6   75           5   Std xxl   25694   75            6   Low Control   58   75            7   Patient 1    532   75           8   Patient pu 4567   75              DataType    Result         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std s   2 99 pg mL   75            2   Std m   5 79 pg mL   75            3   Std I   126 71 pg mL   75            A   Std xl   61 6 93 pg mL   75            5   Std xxl   31 94 84 pg mL   75            6   Low Control   3 02 pg mL   75            7   Patient 1  1 5 98 pg mL   75            8   Patient 2   636 38 pg mL   75               DataType    Count         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std s   75   75            2   Std m   75   75            3   Std     75   75            A   Std xI   75   75           5   Std XxI   75   75            6   Low Control   75   75            7   Patient 1  75   75            8   Patient 2   75   7b       PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 IS OUTPUT CSV file with all additional features enabled     Program   Luminex 100 IS    Build   2 3 BETA    Date   7 28 2004   2 16 30 PM                  SN   LX10001298011BE    Session   Bead 22 Quant Batch    Operator       TemplatelD   4      TemplateName   Quant Batch                     TemplateVersion   2 3c    TemplateDescription   IS 2 3 
16.   10     11     12     13     14     Vortex xMAP reagent containers to ensure homogeneity     Load a microtiter plate with CON1  CON2  and four wells with  sheath fluid in the six desired wells     Click Eject Retract  The plate holder ejects   Place the plate on the plate holder     Fill the Luminex XYP reservoir with a solution of 70   isopropanol or 70  ethanol     Click Eject Retract  The plate holder retracts     If you are using a new lot  click New Control Targets from the  Maintenance tab  fill in the required information  and click OK     Click Prime  The Confirmation dialog box opens  Click OK to  begin priming  Wait until the Prime is completed     Click Eject Retract to eject the Luminex XYP instrument tray   Place 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol in the reservoir  Click  Alcohol Flush  The Confirmation dialog box opens  Click OK  to begin the Alcohol Flush     Click OK and wait until the alcohol flush completes  The Device  Status section on the Status Bar changes from yellow to green  and indicates Standby  This takes about five minutes     Select the well where CONI is located from Step 2 using the  drop down arrow located to the right of the CONI button  Verify  the location  Click CONI  The Confirmation Screen dialog box  opens  Click OK  Wait until CONI completes     Select the well where CON2 is located from Step 2 using the  drop down arrow located to the right of the CON2 button  Verify  the location  Click CON2  The Confirmation Screen dialog box  opens  C
17.   Hesume    5  Cancel Command  Figure 5 12  Acquisition Detail Toolbar    The Histogram  in the lower left section of the Acquisition Detail  tab  defaults to display the Doublet Discriminator  DD  on the X axis  and Events on the Y axis  Doublets appear when two microspheres  stick together  creating undesired results  When you enable the gate   two vertical red  dashed lines appear to represent gate positions  determined by the template or settings established within the New  Advanced Batch  After setting the gate  everything outside the gate is  ignored  You cannot change the gate position during batch  acquisition  You can change the gate positions before data  acquisition  after the system finishes acquiring data  or after pausing  the system  The change is visual  The data is still collected according  to the gate positions set in the assay template or New Advanced  Batch setup  The gate in effect when the system collects data  determines which values to use to obtain the result  Applying a gate  or changing a gate for existing data does not change your calculated  values  The gate positions  also located in the lower corner of the  histogram  are used while collecting data are the numerical values  selected in the template or the New Advanced Batch     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software             e  o   s     Show Bead     lt all gt  w  Ee  9  fl          150       Events  100       50       
18.   Instrument Serial No        Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    The System    Theory of Operation    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS technology is based on flow cell fluorometry with  Luminex developed innovations  The fluidics  optics  robotics   temperature control  software  and xMAP microspheres work  together to enable simultaneous analysis of up to 100 analytes in a  single test sample  Assay analysis requiring temperature control is  provided through the Luminex XYP instrument heater block     There are two fluidics paths in the Luminex 100 analyzer  The first  path involves a syringe driven mechanism that controls the sample  uptake  This mechanism permits small sample uptake volumes from  small reaction volumes  The syringe driven system transports a  specified volume of sample from a sample container to the cuvette   The sample is injected into the cuvette at a steady rate for analysis   Following analysis  the sample path is automatically purged with  sheath buffer by the second fluidics path  This process removes  residual sample within the tubing  valves  and probe  The second  fluidics path is driven by positive air pressure and supplies sheath  fluid to the cuvette and sample path     Sheath fluid is the delivery medium of the sample to the optics  component  The analysis sample is acquired using a sample probe  from a 96 well microtiter plate via the Luminex XYP instrument and  injected into t
19.   Name    Mean  SD  Trimmed Mean  lean  SD  Trimmed Mean       zj    Select  Cancel  Figure 5 60  Open Batch Dialog Box   Select Batch    2  Select the desired batch to export     3  Click Select  The system exports the information  The Export  Batch dialog box opens showing the name and location of the  exported data file  Click OK     A printed batch report includes the following criteria that is applied  to the batch during analysis    e batch name and test name   e formula used     curve fit   e standards     controls     samples    e graph  this is the only way to print a graph of standards       To print data analysis reports     1  On the Home tab  click Analysis     2  In the Open Batch dialog box  select the desired batch to  analyze     3  Inthe Analysis window  click Print Report  The Data  Interpretation Report displays a print preview  See Figure 5 61     4  Select any print options along the title bar and then click the  print button  printer icon      Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Database Management    Procedures    Back Up the  Database    xMAP Technology    5  Atthe Microsoft Windows Print window  select your printer   options  and click Print       Data Interpretation Report    we  14 5   Q  e  Sl                                                                Figure 5 61  Data Interpretation Report  Print Preview     To manage the system database  back up and delete saved data and  files  The system stores data results for instrument calibrators
20.   To ensure accurate test results  properly clean and maintain the  Luminex 100 IS system  Read and follow all instructions in this  section  For your convenience  a maintenance log form is included at  the end of this chapter     Warning  When analyzing potentially infectious biological  samples on the Luminex 100 analyzer  follow standard    laboratory safety practices  These safety precautions should also  be taken when cleaning or maintaining the analyzer        Do not remove the analyzer cover under any circumstances     If the system is powered on  but idle for more than four hours  click  the Maintenance tab  Click Warmup  Wait 30 minutes for the  Luminex 100 analyzer and the optics system to warm up         Before you run samples     1  Turn the Luminex 100 analyzer on  The system begins warming  automatically     2  Verify the levels of sheath fluid and waste fluid     3  When the system is warmed up  click Prime to prime the  analyzer  then click OK     4  Click Alcohol Flush  A confirmation dialog box opens  Click  Eject Retract to eject the Luminex XYP instrument tray  Place  at least 1 2 mL of 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol in the  reservoir  Click OK     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    5  Click Wash  In the confirmation dialog box  click on the drop   down arrow located to the right of the Eject Retract button to  choose the desired location  Click Eject Retract  The Luminex  XYP instrument tray ejects  Place sheath fluid in the selecte
21.   between batches  and multi batches  after sanitize  and before daily shutdown         To perform a Wash command        Onthe Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract     2  Select Reservoir from the dropdown menu next to the Wash  button  then click Wash  A confirmation dialog box opens telling  you to place solution in the reservoir     3  Putdistilled water in the reservoir     4  Click OK  The plate holder retracts  and the system performs the  Wash command     Refer to your assay kit instructions to see if the assay needs to be  analyzed at a particular temperature  If the instructions indicate that  the Luminex XYP instrument heater is needed  set the heater to the  specified heat setting  The user definable heater range is 35 C to  60  C  Use the heater only with the heater block in place     Luminex recommends using a Costar   Thermowell   thin wall  polycarbonate 96 well plate  nonskirted   model P over the heater  block sent with the Luminex System  Do not use standard 96 well  microtiter plates if you are using the heater block     Any temperature that you set remains in effect until you set another  temperature or turn off the Luminex X YP instrument plate heater or  exit the software     The system displays the target temperature in the box below the Turn  ON button  Before the heater block temperature reaches the new  temperature setting  the XYP Heater Temperature thermometer is  red  Upon reaching the target temperature  the thermometer turns  green  See page 5 9
22.   create   new session 5 52    D  daily  activities 6 1  database  backup 5 90  compressed patient reports 4 3  management 5 91  restore 5 91  decontamination 2 2  2 9  5 45  5 96  detailed sample progress 5 11  digital signal processor 4 1  dilution factor 5 64  discard waste 6 2  disconnect from AC power 6 4  draining the system 5 94  during operation 2 2    E  efficiency 4 1  eject retract  XYP plate holder B 10  electronics 3 5  3 7  specifications 3 5  enable raw data storage 5 39    Index 2    xMAP Technology    entering sample data 4 2  erasing data from database 5 91  errors tab 5 22  establish   insert off plate commands 5 70  European Union  EU  safety requirements 2 3  excitation 4 1  excitation wavelength 4 1  exit the Luminex 100 IS software 5 97  export   batch data 5 89   batches 5 41    F   filter 3 8  air intake 3 9  replacing    air intake 6 6   sheath 3 9  3 11  flow cytometry 4 1  flow rate 3 5  fluidics 2 3  3 5  4 1   components 3 8   illustration 3 8   leak 2 4   path 4 1   specifications 3 5   warning 3 8  fluorescence 3 4  4 2  5 39  fluorescent signal 4 2  fuses   product number 8 1   replacing 6 11    G    general  Luminex 100 analyzer specifications 3 5    H    hardware  specifications 3 2  testing 3 2  heat 2 2  2 8  heat warning labels 2 8  heater block 5 46  8 1  height adjustment locking screw B 8  help menu 5 38    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    high waste volume 6 3       idle   more than 4 hours 6 1  improper system operatio
23.   diagnostic tests  The results display on the Diagnostics tab     Clean the sample probe  Remove the sample probe and sonicate the  narrow end for 2 3 minutes Use a syringe to flush the sample probe  with distilled water from the narrow end out through the larger end   Replace the sample probe and readjust the sample probe height for   the plates you are using with the Luminex XYP instrument     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Flush the System Run 3 backflushes  3 drains  2 alcohol flushes and 3 washes with  distilled water     Monthly       Clean the Sample Probe  Danger  Be sure that the system is not performing an operation  when you remove the sample probe    Caution  The Luminex XYP instrument sample probe should slide   up easily while removing it from the sample arm  If you feel   resistance  do not force the probe up  Contact Luminex Technical   Support        To clean the sample probe    1  Remove the sample probe as follows  First  unsnap the light  housing located above the probe  Then  unscrew the Cheminert  fitting on top of the probe completely  Next  gently grasp the  probe and push up  Remove the probe out of the top of the  sample arm    2  Clean the sample probe using a bath sonicator or using a 10 mL  syringe  If you are using a bath sonicator  place the smaller end  of the sample probe in the bath sonicator for 2 to 5 minutes  If  you are using a syringe  force 10  to 20  bleach through the  larger end of the sample probe    3  R
24.   l uminex Corporation   8    Address   12212 Technology Boulevard  Austin  TX 78727 6115       Phone    512  219 8020          FAX   512  219 5195 a   fa    Logo           Figure 5 22  Options Dialog Box   Company Information Tab    Use the Data Export tab to configure your export data  See Figure 5   23  The following options are available     Auto Export Batches  Select this feature to automatically export  the  csv file formats when the system finishes analyzing the batch   This allows you to run your own programs on exported data without  having to manually start the export  This feature also takes place  after acquisition completes  If this is not selected while running a  New Advanced Batch  you must right click on the data grid to get  your output csv file     Copy Output csv file to Common Output Dir  Select to send a  copy of the Output csv file to the My Batches Output folder     Prompt for Batch Comment  Check this button to initiate a  prompt for batch commenting when a batch is finished     Write Sample Comments  Select to add sample comments to the  Notes column in the output csv file     Additional Export Stats  Select to define which sample statistics  to export outside the Luminex IS 2 3 software to the Output csv file     Test Sort Order  Choose an option to define the sorting order  For  more information on the options  see the Command section   beginning on page 5 31     Additional Batch Information  Select one or more options to add  additional informati
25.   located on the Diagnostics tab  is more than  3 degrees     Each step usually takes less than one minute  You must run xMAP  controls after each calibration  See    Run System xMAP Controls     on page 5 49         To replace the analyzer air intake filter     1     Disconnect the Luminex 100 analyzer from ac power by turning  off the power switch on the rear of the analyzer  then unplugging  the power cord from the wall source     On the back of the Luminex 100 analyzer  in the upper left  corner  remove the screw at the top of the panel and open the  panel door     Grasp the tubing and pull the filter 3 to 4 inches from the unit   See Figure 6 2     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology         5 E   Model No  g urne x    S N  LX 100002450      Ed   Lumine C Blvd     Figure 6 2 Grasping the Tubing    4  Remove the filter with one hand  and hold the tubing with the  other hand     5  Connect a new filter to the tubing and position the filter inside  the panel     6  Reattach the panel door to the unit     7  Plugin and power on the Luminex 100 analyzer     Luminex XYP Instrument     To replace the XYP instrument air intake filter   Air Intake Filter    1  Disconnect the Luminex XYP instrument from ac power by  turning off the power switch on the rear of the Luminex XYP  instrument  then unplugging the Luminex XYP instrument power  cord from the wall source     2  Onthe back of the Luminex XYP instrument  to the left side   gently remove the screen from the
26.   number  and developing company for the template that you are using  in a batch     The Insert command lets you insert a patient into a batch or skip a  well     The Command list displays the commands that were imported from  the template  plus commands added using the Insert command or  manually entered  The lock in the far left column indicates that the  command was imported from the template and cannot be changed in  the Batch Setup window     The Microtiter Plate image reflects the command information for  each well  as defined in the template     The Command button group contains the Finish  Cancel  Load Pa  List  and Help command buttons  For more information on these  commands  see the Commands section  beginning on page 5 31     The Save group box contains the Save and Load and Save only  option buttons  For more information on these commands  see the  Commands section  beginning on page 5 31     The Standard Info group box is visible only if the template you are  using requires the use of standards  If standards are used in the  template  the Standard Info group box reflects the Standard  information as defined in the template product     The Control Info group box is visible only if the template you are  using requires the use of controls  If controls are used in the  template  the Control Info group box reflects the Control information  as defined in the template products     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Analysis Window    xMAP Technology    The New L
27.   the system allows editing without requiring a new lot   name  However  if you have analyzed a previous batch using this lot   the system will require that you rename the lot if edited or modified     Background samples are commonly used in the assay process   Although recommended  the discretion on whether to use or not is  left to the assay or kit developer  If background samples are included  they are defined in the assay template     Background samples are samples with no active test substance  The  system uses background samples to remove assay background noise  from the sample results  Typical background samples contain  coupled beads  assay buffer  detection reagents  and reporter  fluorophore  Background samples do not contain target analytes     If the background sample is designated accordingly  the system  subtracts the background sample s reported fluorescence from all  other samples in a batch to report net MFI  If a batch contains more    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    than one background sample  the fluorescence values of the two  background samples are averaged together and subtracted from the  other samples to obtain a net fluorescence intensity     Samples Tab The Samples tab lists tests from your batch and displays the results  for each sample     Figure 5 20 shows a Sample tab example listing three tests  Notice  that the left pane displays Test IL 4  IL 6 and IL 8 with Test IL 4  selected  The right pane shows the IL 4 sample r
28.   xMAP Technology    Sample2    SampleM   StatN   StatN Header  Sample Location  Sample Name  Test1  Test2        TestN  Total Count  Notes   Sample1   Sample2    SampleM    Blank Lines e    Field Definitions    There is one blank line between the Date and SN fields     There are four blank lines between the Operator field  or last  optional field  and Samples field     There is one blank line between the Samples and Results fields     There is one blank line between the Results field and the first  statistical data block     There is one blank line between each of the statistical data  blocks     Table D 1 Field Definitions       Field Name    Field Value Description          Program   value  lt  CC gt     The name of the Luminex application that created the  OUTPUT CSV file  If the file is generated by a non US  operating system  the country code  in hex  is appended        Build   value       The version of the Luminex application that created the  OUTPUT CSV file        Date   date    time       The date  amp  time that the OUTPUT CSV file was created  This  field is not related to batch execution time  Note that the date  and time values are separated into distinct  adjacent fields    Date   04 14 2003   02 46 45 PM   to maintain compatibility  with previous versions of software        SN   value       The serial number of the Luminex 100 device with which the  batch was executed        Session   value       The name of the batch  The term Session was used here to  maint
29.  00 00 e eee eee eee C 8  Index Index 1    Vili PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Introduction    About This Manual    The Luminex 100 IS  2 3 System    Intended Use    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    This manual provides you with information to understand and use the  Luminex   100    IS system  It consists of multiple chapters and  appendices that take you from this introduction to complete system  operation     The manual   s text and figures offer examples when necessary   Procedures are presented as step by step instructions  Glossary and  index sections assist as references     The conventions in this manual assume that the reader has a basic  familiarity with computers  xMAP   technology  and a knowledge of  Microsoft   Windows   software  We typically document the  common methods of accessing a command  such as from the main  menu bar  from the toolbar  and from menus that appear when you  right click an area of the screen  Refer to the Glossary appendix for  unfamiliar terminology     The Luminex 100 IS 2 3 system is a benchtop system consisting of  the Luminex 100 analyzer  computer  monitor  keyboard  mouse   Luminex XY Platform instrument  Luminex XYP      Luminex  Sheath Delivery System  Luminex SD      software  barcode reader   sheath and waste containers  and xMAP technology reagents     The Luminex software is designed to use xMAP technology with  assay kits available through kit manufacturers  The Luminex 100 IS  2 3 system performs a wide range of xMAP technology b
30.  00 071 Rev  C    The System    55  C  95  F to 131  F  when performing heated assays and using  the heater block    Indoor use only   Operating temperature  15 C to 30 C  59 F to 86 F    Humidity  20  to 80   noncondensing   Altitude  Operation up to 2400 m  7874 ft   above mean sea level    Physical dimensions  43 cm  17 inches  W x 50 5 cm  20 inches   D x 24 5 cm  9 5 inches  H    Weight  maximum of 25 kg  60 Ibs      UL installation category  UL Installation Category II  as defined  in Annex J of UL 61010A 1    Pollution degree  UL Pollution Degree 2  as defined in Section  3 7 3 2 of UL 61010A 1    Shipping and storage  The allowable shipping and storage  temperature and humidity ranges are 0  C to   50  C and 20 80   noncondensing  respectively    Input voltage range  100   120 V    10   1 4 Amp  and 200 240  V      1096  0 8 Amp  47 63 Hz     AC inlet fuse  3 Amp  250 V   fast acting    Reporter laser  532 nm  nominal output 10 15 mW  maximum  500 mW  frequency doubled diode  mode of operation   continuous wave  CW     Classification laser  635 nm  9 1 mW x 6   maximum output 25  mW  diode  mode of operation  continuous wave  CW     Reporter detector  Photomultiplier tube  detection bandwidth of  565 585 nm    Classification detector  Avalanche photo diodes with temperature  compensation    Doublet discrimination detector  Avalanche photo diodes with  temperature compensation    Sheath flow rate 90 uL   5 uL second  Cuvette  200 micron square flow channel  Sample inje
31.  071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software Installation      About Luminex100 IS Software    Luminex100   IS Software    Version 2 3 147    Data acquisiton application for Luminex100   IS       1996 2004 Luminex Corporation   All rights reserved        Warning  This computer program is protected by  copyright law and international treaties   Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this  program  or any portion of it  may result in severe    criminal and civil penalties  and will be prosecuted  to the maximum extent possible under law  E  nfo    Figure B 16 Software Information Window       3  Run system calibration  See Calibration Procedures  page 5 46     to complete the verification process by running the system  calibrators and controls     To upgrade to Luminex IS 2 3 software you perform these  procedures in the following order     Optionally  archive your    My Sessions    folder  Remove LMAT software   Remove Luminex 100 Version 1 7 software  Install Luminex IS 2 3 software    Verify successful upgrade    To preserve your Luminex 100 Version 1 7 session data  archive your     C  My Sessions  folder  Copy the files to another folder or save  them to a diskette or CD  Luminex 100 IS Version 2 3 software  maintains session data in a database  not in the My Sessions folder     Remove the Luminex LMAT software using the Windows Control    Panel    1  On the PC desktop select  Start gt Settings gt Control Panel   The Control Panel opens on the desktop    2  Double clic
32.  3   Std      75   75            A   Std xI   75   75            5   Std xxI   75   75            6   Low Control   75   75            7   Patient 1   75   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   75   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Mean         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1   Std s   240 733333333333   75            2   Std m   503 213333333333   75        PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3     3   Std l   4450 92   75        xMAP Technology        4   Std xI   13478 6666666667   75           5   Std xxI   24817 8933333333   75            6   Low Control   60   75            7   Patient 1   561 12   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   14402 3466666667   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType     CV         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1   Std s   662 071761559013   75            2   Std m   42 0677216044823   75            3   Std I   28 540875012004   75            4   Std xl   30 4524100927965   75            5   Std xxl   17 3369506373774   75            6   Low Control   34 9506301308939   75            7   Patient 1   27 7364540209588   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   28 9726898443063   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Peak         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std S   45   75            2   Std m   447   75   
33.  4   Std xI   13634 5217391304   75           5   Std xxl   25095    75             6   Low Control   58 8695652173913   75            7   Patient 1   551 36231884058   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   14594 7391304348   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Trimmed  CV         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1   Std s   23 9771317653444   75           2   Std m   26 4392256987905   75            3   Std I   20 718201051022   75            4   Std xl   25 4309644452528   75            5   Std xxl   14 0816389192424   75            6   Low Control   22 0787072692933   75            7   Patient 1   21 231629005304   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   20 5061473536575   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Trimmed Peak         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std S    45   75            2   Std m   447   75           3   Std I   3985   75            A   Std xl   371 5  75          5   Std xxl   1 5788   75            6   Low Control   58   75            7   Patient 1   430   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   8163   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2         PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3     DataType    Trimmed StdDev     xMAP Technology        Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1   Std s   13 6634901596136   75            2   Std m   130 7323916509
34.  40  view 5 83  Analysis window  function keys 5 22  analyzer 2 3  3 7  4 1  connections 3 7  maintenance functions B 9  ventilation filter 6 9  analyzing results 4 2  assay errors 5 24  assay kits 1 1  1 2  4 2    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    assembling and powering system B 1  assigning dilution factors to samples 5 64  auto start analysis 5 40  avoid  beam exposure 2 6  shining beam into people s eyes 2 7  staring into beam 2 7    back up the database 5 90  background information 4 1  analytes 4 1  flow cytometry 4 1  measure 4 1  soluble analytes 4 1  barcode label 3 7  barcode reader 4 2  batch  analyze processed batch 5 83  data  export 5 89  reprocess 5 56  Batch Summary Report 5 87  biohazard 2 2  biological 2 2  warning 2 7  blue indicator light 2 2  2 8    C    calibration 6 4  definition A 1  schedule 4 2  trend report 4 3  5 87  verification 5 47  capacity specifications 3 4  caution 2 1  2 5  2 6  CD supplied 3 3  CE mark 2 3  cheminert fitting 3 8  B 7  classification laser 3 5  4 1    Index 1    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    clean   accessible surfaces 6 4  Clear Preliminary Off plate commands 5 69  Clinical Assay Report 5 86  clinical samples 3 2  commands  off plate 5 69  component of Luminex 100 IS 2 7  components 2 2  3 2   xMAP reagents 1 1  conceptual information 4 1  confirmation screen 5 39  connect   barcode reader B 5   keyboard B 5   Luminex 100 IS analyzer B 3   mouse B 5   PC B 5   XYP B 3  connectors   air  waste  and sheath fluid 3 11
35.  47         To verify system calibration with controls     1  Inthe Maintenance tab  click New CON Targ  The Update  CON Target Information dialog box opens  See Figure 5 26     2  Enter the CONI lot number  expiration date  and the values listed  from the COQ included with your system controls into the  CONI entry boxes  If you are using a previously entered lot   select it from the drop down menu in the Current CON 1 group  box or click Import to import the information  See page 5 50 for  more details on importing a lot     3  Repeat step 2 for the CON2 lot information          Update CON Targets                                                                                                       CON 1  Product Information   Lot Information  Number  Value  L100 CON1 Lot Number E 682  Name  Expiration Date    12 06 2002 a   Classification Control T     Target Information  MEDIE Reference Target Al Target Bl Target C1  emner 1 9861 769 218  Current CONI Lot  A1682 e 2P Lo 953  3 10675 23422 5607   A1682 4 8946 2573 17803  por CONT   sed Owens   LS 9886 233 5795  ooe            Product Information r Lot Information  Number    Value  L100 CON2 Lot Number A1440  Name  Expiration Date   09 21 2002 zl  Reporter Control  Manufacturer  Target Information  Luminex Reference  Target A1  1 29 1  Current CON2 Lot  A1440 2   197   e   1910  Import CON 2   Export CON 2 aliai    17429    NewLot   Lot       Change the current lot by saving selected lot           Luminex 100 IS User Manual V
36.  5 10  Plate Layout Tab   Selection Shortcuts       Click column heading to select entire column        Click row heading to select entire row        Click the top left corner of the plate to select entire plate              Each well can have a series of off plate commands that run before  the next well is read  You can insert preliminary off plate commands  that run before the first well     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Managing Assay Lots    Create a New Lot    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    You can edit standard and control lot information  Once a lot is used   changing or modifying it will prompt you for a new lot name  This  includes batches that have been set up  but not yet acquired     You can modify known lot concentration values  If you change the  known concentration for a used lot  the system prompts you to enter  a new lot name  If you change the concentration values in an unused  lot  the system updates the lot with the new concentration values     For assay reagents specified in templates  you can create new lots   edit lot information  select pre existing lots for reuse  import lots   and export lots     When editing lot numbers  follow these lot handling rules       If you have entered lot information for a template  but you  have not used the template to set up a batch  you can edit the  lot value      If you have entered lot information and have used the template  to set up a batch  even if it has not b
37.  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Output  C SV    Overview    Overall Design    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    This chapter describes the file specification for the Luminex 100 IS  2 3 OUTPUT CSV file  Although this document may refer to older  versions of Luminex software for historical purposes  it is intended  only to describe the OUTPUT CSV file for the Luminex 100 IS 2 3  system  Although this chapter was prepared to ensure accuracy   Luminex assumes no liability for errors or omissions or for damages  resulting from the application or use of this information     The OUTPUT CSV file was created to provide a simple data report   The file displays general batch information and statistical results   Note that the term Batch is synonymous with Session in other  versions of Luminex Software     The OUTPUT CSV file contains two blocks of information  The first  is the header  which contains general batch information  The second  block of information is the results section  which contains several  subsections displaying statistical analyses in a Sample versus Test  format  as illustrated in the following example     Batch Header    Results   Stati   Stati Header  Sample Location  Sample Name  Test1  Test2        TestN  Total Count  Notes   Sample1   Sample2    SampleM   Stat2   StatN Header  Sample Location  Sample Name  Test1  Test2        TestN  Total Count  Notes   Sample1    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3  
38.  Errors tab in a batch analysis   Message Possible problem Solution       Insufficient Bead Count    There are not enough beads seen  to meet the minimum requested     Ensure there are 2000 5000  beads per set per well   Ensure proper beads are  selected    Adjust sample probe height   Resuspend beads in the wells   Check for clogs        Temperature Divergence from  Calibration Temperature    You are running the system at  an ambient temperature that is  out of range of the temperature  at which the system was initially  calibrated     Calibrate and verify the system   If this message still appears  after calibration  contact  Technical Support        Failed Control in Batch     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    One or more of the assay  controls are not within the  expected range     Verify that you selected the  correct template     Verify that the correct assay lot  number and concentration  values were selected and entered  correctly     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Verify that the system is  functioning properly by running  the system controls  If the  system controls pass  contact the  kit manufacturer        Failed Curve Fit The calculation could not occur  for the assay standards for data  interpretation     Verify that you selected the  correct template     Verify that the correct control  lot number and target values  were selected and entered  correctly     Verify that the system is  functioning properly by running  the system controls  
39.  Faresi    Figure 5 53  Options Dialog Box   Select Auto start Analysis    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Analyze  Processed Batch  Data    View Detailed Test  Analysis    Validating or  Invalidating  Standards and  Controls    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    2  Click the Auto Start Analysis checkbox  then click OK  When  the system completes the batch acquisition  it will automatically  begin analyzing data     You can analyze only processed batches  If you acquire or process  batches as a multi batch  the system lists them separately and they  must be analyzed separately     All batches within a multi batch have the multi batch name listed  under the multi batch ID name column  This allows you to see the  batches that have been processed as a multi batch         To analyze data from processed batches and multi batches     1  On the Home tab  click Analysis  The Open Batch dialog box  opens showing only processed batches     2  Selecta batch to analyze and click Select  The system loads the  batch and the Analysis window displays the Standards tab         To view detailed test analysis     1  On the Home tab  click Analysis  The Open Batch dialog box  opens     2  Click on the desired batch to analyze and click Select  The  Analysis window opens showing the progress as the system  opens the batch and analyzes the data  Each test displays   Analyzing  as the system calculates     3  Onthe Standards tab  select the test or ana
40.  Finish  Do not close the Add Remove Programs  dialog box  Continue with the following    Remove Luminex 100  Version 1 7 Software    section     You remove the Luminex 100 Version 1 7 software through the  Windows Control Panel     If you are continuing from the previous section  then skip to step 3     1     On the PC desktop select  Start gt Settings gt Control Panel   The Control Panel dialog box opens on the desktop     Double click the Add Remove Programs icon  The  Add Remove Programs dialog box opens     Under the Currently installed programs list  select the Luminex  Data Collector entry  The entry expands to include the Change   Remove button  Click Change Remove     The InstallShield Wizard dialog box opens  Select Remove and  click Next     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software Installation    5  Click OK in the Confirmation File Deletion dialog box     If a Shared File Detected dialog box opens  select the Don t  display this message again checkbox  then click Yes     If a Self registration error dialog box opens  Click OK     6  When the InstallShield Wizard   Maintenance Complete dialog  box opens  click Finish     7  Click Close on the Add Remove Programs dialog box  Click the  X on the Control Panel to close     8  Ifthe LMAT and the Luminex Data Collector icons are still  present on the desktop  drag the icons to the Recycle Bin     Install Luminex To install the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software  continue with Install  1001S 2 3
41.  Luminex  XYP instrument       PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Table 5 1  System Monitor Values  Continued                    Property Value Units of Measure  XYP Heater Temperature In Indicates if the XYP heater is in  Range the set range          The Detailed Sample Progress section displays the percentage of  completion for each bead ID or test  The graph shows real time  progress  so that as each sample is analyzed  the graph adjusts to  show progress  Use the zoom button to view up to 20 tests at a time   Use the toggle button to view the bead ID or test name  Use the  Expand Margin  up down and left right  arrows to expand the chart  margins and view longer test names  See Figure 5 9     1 2         Detailed Sample Progress            1 23        Complete       34 73 77  Tests  Bead ID        1  Zoom button  2  Toggle button  3  Expand Margin arrows  Figure 5 9  Detailed Sample Progress    The Message Log is the lower pane on the Diagnostic tab  It displays  a list of completed commands  errors  and warnings  It also displays  command progress  time and date  and results  See Figure 5 10     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology       55 Database age 5i 1001 11 10 06 AM Batch data exported Wy BatchesiDNA Batch_ID2 oukg  54 Commands Finished Time  5 25 2001 11 10 05 AM   53 Device State Change Time  5 25 2001 11 10 05 AM Old State  Processing New State  Idle   52 Command Co
42.  Luminex XYP instrument  filter  Note  Do not remove the screws  See Figure 6 3     6 6 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Maintenance and Cleaning       Figure 6 3 Removing the Screen    3  Replace the filter and replace the screen  See Figure 6 4        Figure 6 4 Removing and Replacing the Filter    4  Plug in and turn on Luminex XYP instrument power     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 6 7    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Syringe Seal    xMAP Technology        To replace the syringe plunger seal     Danger  The syringe arm does not deactivate when changing the    plunger  injury could result if the system is not unplugged        1  Disconnect the Luminex 100 analyzer from ac power by turning  off the power switch on the rear of the analyzer  then unplugging  the power cord from the wall source     2  Open the center most door on the front of the Luminex 100  analyzer     3  Locate the syringe  a glass cylinder with a metal rod   See  Figure 6 5                  wc       1  Syringe Seal 2  Syringe  Figure 6 5 Syringe and Syringe Seal    4  Unscrew the knob on the syringe arm  at the bottom of the  syringe   and forcefully push the syringe arm down     5  Unscrew the syringe from the top of its housing    6  Pull the plunger out of the syringe    7  Remove and replace the plunger seal  Keep the black    O    ring   8  Return the plunger to the syringe    9  Screw the syringe back into its housing     10  Return the syringe arm to its original position     PN 
43.  Message Log Directory  e Delete the Batch Directory        To display the Cleanup Utility dialog box     On the Tools menu  click Cleanup  The Cleanup Utility dialog  box opens  See Figure 5 62     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software       Pele     P Delete Delete  E Batch  Directo Directo    Figure 5 62  Cleanup Utility Dialog Box    28  Luminex100 IS Software   Cleanup UG      Cleanup              To perform a disk cleanup     l   2     In the Cleanup Utility dialog box  click Disk Cleanup     In the Select Drive dialog box  select the desired drive and click  OK  The Disk Cleanup dialog box opens showing it is  calculating progress  This can take several minutes     When Windows finishes calculating the cleanup it displays the  Disk Cleanup for dialog box  See Figure 5 63  Check or  uncheck the desired files to delete and click OK  Windows  deletes the files and closes the dialog box     28  Disk Cleanup for  C      Disk Cleanup   More Options      xi       You can use Disk Cleanup to free up to 858 175 KB of disk   m space on EL    Files to delete      z9 Downloaded Program Files       a Temporary Internet Files 765 KB  Ma Recycle Bin 118KB  Es  Temporary files 64KB   V  53 Temporary Offline Files 0KB v   Total amount of disk space you gain  858111 K       r  Description    Downloaded Program Files are ActiveX controls and Java applets  downloaded automatically from the Intemet when you view certain  pages  They are temporari
44.  New Lot      Figure 5 56  Choose Lot Dialog Box   Standard Only          3  To create a new lot from this dialog box as an alternate method   click New Lot and follow the steps in the Create New Lot  procedure on    Create a New Lot  on page 5 71       To create a new lot for use within a batch     1  Click New Lot     2  Inthe Update Lot Info dialog box  select Standard lot or  Control lot  then click Save to display the Choose Lot dialog  box  An asterisk identifies the selected lot  See Figure 5 55     Running Reports and You can output data by printing reports and exporting batch data   Analyses  Report Types The Luminex IS 2 3 software can format your batch or multibatch  results in a variety of export formats and provide different types of    information in different types of reports     Analyte Report   prints some or all of the samples grouped by the  test in a batch     Clinical Patient Report   provides a breakdown of samples  according to the test analysis with that sample     Patient Summary Report   prints all of the test results for a patient   may include all tests or selected tests on the report     Quality Control Report   used to track the trends of assay standards  and assay controls over a period of time     5 86 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Maintenance Report   provides a history of all maintenance  operations performed during the date range entered by the operator     B
45.  See Figure 5 4     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology                 Elle Tools Help    4s m  o j m zi E   S A 2 J  Single Step         Home Run Batch   Maintenance   Diagnostics   Acq  Detail   Luminex100 Integrated System 2 3   lt No Batch Loaded                KOOOOOOOOOOOO     a0OOOOOOOOOOQOO              QOOOOOOOOOOO    a 0OOOOOOOOOQOO EIN sheath  g  0D0DX0O0O0O0OOOOO    gKOOOOOOOOOOQO  s000000O0O0O0O0O0OQ   amp OOOOOOOOOOOO                CmdNo Command Plate Loc Cmd Status       E    a  Eject  neta                   i ee  Mite Warmedup 0    Standby     tating    1  Microtiter plate reservoir image 2  Temperature and Pressure Gauges    3  Command List  Figure 5 4  Run Batch Tab    The command buttons on the Run Batch tab are     e Print Worklist e  Bject Retract  e Start Plate e Resume  e Cancel Command e Pause    e Cancel all    For more information on these commands  see the Commands  section  starting on page 5 31  For more information on setting up  batches  see See  Batch Setup Procedures  on page 51     The microtiter plate and reservoir image represents where you  place samples or other fluids used in running or maintaining the  system  Samples are analyzed vertically  from top to bottom within  the column  and then from left to right for subsequent columns     The Temperature and Pressure Gauges show information about the    analyzer and the XYP instrument  The XYP heater temperature  measures the internal Luminex XYP instrument plate temper
46.  This label is attached to the barcode reader         4 460 120    4 593 186    4 652 750    4 673 805 e 4 736 095 e 4 816 660     4 845 350 e 4 861 972 e 4 866 257   4 897 456    5 179 270 e 5 810 904  5 237 161    5 247 161   5 247 162  5 258 604 e 5 260 554 e 5 298 728  5 311 000   5 330 370    5 468 949  5 474 206    5 481 098   Other patents pending      COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING PATENTS  4 387297 e 4 409 470    Figure 2 9 Barcode Reader Laser Label    Do not stare into the beam or shine it into other people s eyes     Mechanical    Warning  During operation  this system contains exposed   moving parts  Risk of personal injury is present  Observe all  warnings and cautions     Warning  During operation  this system contains exposed   moving parts which could result in puncture hazard  Risk of  personal injury is present  Keep hands and fingers away from the  Luminex XYP instrument slot during operation     Warning  During operation  this system contains exposed   moving parts which could result in pinch point hazard  Risk of  personal injury is present  Keep hands and fingers away from the  Luminex XYP instrument slot during operation        Note  Access doors must be  closed while operating the  Luminex 100 analyzer  the  operator must be present during  operation     Biological    Warning  Human and animal samples may contain biohazardous  infectious agents     Where exposure  including aerosol  to potentially biohazardous  material exists  follow appropr
47.  Unauthorized additional  software is prohibited and may result in improper operation of the  system        USB communications link for fast data transfer    e Automatic transfer of assay templates and new reagent  information into the system via a large capacity read write CD    e Installation   lt  4 hours   e System calibration   lt  10 minutes   e System controls   lt  10 minutes   e Barcode reader entry of sample IDs   e Automatic post analysis   e Analyze one 96 well plate hour depending on manufacturer s kit  e Up to 100 x MAP microsphere sets per sample   e Sheath flowrate  90 uL sec     5 uL   e Sample injection rate into detector area  1 uL sec   0 05 uL    e System warmup  30 minutes  Systems that remain inactive for at  least four hours will require a warm up to restart the lasers  After    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Accuracy and Precision    Sensitivity    Capacity    xMAP Technology    acquiring sample  running system calibrators  running system  controls  and warming up the instrument  the system resets the  four hour internal clock     Sample uptake volume    5   Classification of xMAP microspheres   gt  80     Misclassification of xMAP microspheres   lt  2    may vary by  xMAP microsphere product lines  Refer to the specific product  information sheet for further details     Temperature control  0 C to   2 C of target  Internal sample carry over     0 996    Soluble background fluorescence emission at 575 nm  automatically subtracted from fluor
48.  When the database is 98  full  sample acquisition is prevented   System calibration and control information is not affected when you  erase sample information  The system also does not affect standard  and control information while erasing data from the database       To erase information from the database     1  On the Tools menu  click Erase Database  The Choose Date  calendar opens     2  Choose the day after the last day of the database entries that you  want to erase  For example  all data prior to January 16 are  erased  January 16 is kept     3  Click OK  The Delete Database Entries dialog box opens and  warns that you are about to delete database records     4  Ifyou are sure you want to delete this data  click Yes  The  system deletes all events stored before the day you select     Restore the database from a previously saved database         To restore information to the database     1  On the Tools menu  click Database Restore  The Restore  Database dialog box warns you that the Luminex IS 2 3  software will shut down after restoring the database     2  Click Yes to continue to restore a database     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Maintenance Procedures    xMAP Technology    3  From the Restore Database From dialog box  select a database  backup file to restore and click Open  The system restores the  previously saved database  Notice that the files are organized by  date  month day year      4  ADatabase Restored dialog box opens the next time you star
49.  a Class II laser product consisting of a Class I laser  product  Luminex 100 analyzer  and a Class II laser product   barcode reader         Figure 2 5 Laser Product Class Label    United States and international regulations require the following  warnings to appear on the instrument during operation and  maintenance     This label appears on the back panel of the Luminex 100 analyzer        Figure 2 6 Laser Radiation Caution Label    Under NO circumstances should you remove the Luminex 100  analyzer cover  When performing routine maintenance  turn power  to the Luminex 100 analyzer OFF and the disconnect the power cord     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    All laser apertures are located within the Luminex 100 analyzer and  are contained within a protective housing  This label appears on the  optics cover within the Luminex 100 analyzer        Figure 2 7 Laser Class Label    Warning     Use of controls or adjustments or performance of  procedures other than those specified herein may result in  hazardous radiation exposure     des commandes ou r  glages ou  l ex  cution des proc  dures autres que celles sp  cifi  es dans les  pr  sentes prescriptions peuvent entrainer d une exposition    un  rayonnement dangereux        This label appears above the laser apertures located inside the optics  enclosure inside the Luminex 100 analyzer        Figure 2 8 Avoid Exposure Label    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Safety    Barcode Reader Laser
50.  a dialog  box related to the specific report opens  The system information  may vary depending on the type of report you select     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Batch Selection    Select the batch that contains the patient information     AM   DNA Quant Run by 5P formula          Figure 5 58  Batch Selection Dialog Box    Enter the information  in this example  a patient report  and click  Next  Another information dialog box opens  Enter specific  information for the type of report the system is compiling   Figure 5 59 shows a Patient Selection example     is  Patient Selection xj    Select available Patients from the list on the left     Patient 2  Patient 3  Patient 4       Previous   Finish   Cancel         Figure 5 59  Patient Selection Dialog Box    Select the desired entry or click the double arrow   gt  gt   to select  all the entries     Click Finish  A report print preview appears using the  information you entered  You may have more than one dialog  box in which to enter information     Click Print Report to print the report     The Print dialog box opens  Select the desired parameters and  click Print     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Export Batch Data    Print Data  Analysis Report    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software        To export batch data     1  On the File menu    click Export Batch Data  The Open Batch  dialog box opens  See Figure 5 60        Description       Multi Batch ID
51.  an analyte     Pertaining to calculations that determine the precise numerical  measurement of an analyte     A molecule  or combination of molecules  with a specific range of  excitation and emission wavelengths that is used to identify or  quantify an analyte  Examples of acceptable reporters for the  Luminex 100 IS are Phycoerythrin and Alexa 532     A specific range of wavelengths that includes the emission  wavelength of a designated reporter molecule     Refers to the dyes bound to the surface of the xMAP microsphere   Also see reporter channel     See reporter channel     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    sample    sample reaction  signal    standards microspheres   assay    suspension    system controls    template    verification    xMAP    xMAP Technology    The mixture of assay components  microspheres  reporter  patient  diluent  that are analyzed     The reaction that occurs between your reagents and the beads   Detectable measurement unit of the reporter molecule     Assay standards are substances of know concentrations used to  derive a standard curve with which unknown samples and controls  are compared to determine their concentration or quantity  See  control microspheres  assay     Solution consisting of homogeneously dispersed microspheres in an  aqueous medium     Include the xMAP reporter and classification control microspheres   They are used to verify the calibration of the Luminex 100 analyzer     A sequence of commands and predetermined sett
52.  begin on page 5 92  Table 5   11 on page 5 92 shows a recommended use schedule for maintenance  operations     Use the Diagnostics tab to monitor the progress of commands you  initiate in the system  Features on this tab monitor the state of system  components  This tab displays the System Monitor  Detailed Sample  Progress chart  and Message Log  The Text on the Diagnostics tab  turns red if the system encounters an error  The Message Log on the  Diagnostics tab indicates where the error occurred      s  fs   Luminex       tics   Acq  Detail      Luminex100 Integrated System 2 3          System Monitor    Property    Detailed Sample Progress  96     Pal 123        Air Pressure    06 06 2002 4 42 43 PM       Sheath Pressure    06 06 2002 4 44 04 PM       Delta Cal Temp    06 06 2002 4 45 42 PM       Board Temp    06 06 2002 4 46 45 PM       DD Temp    288       CL1 Temp    285       CL2 Temp    275       XYP Board Temp    288       XYP Htr Temp    285       XYP Htr In Range                215       18 Device     Chang  17 Command Completed  16 Command Started                New State  Idle      CommandNo  1 of 1 Plate Location  D1  Plat  CommandNo  1 of 1 Plate Location  D1  Plat    ge 02 4 46 45 PM Old State  Proc g  Time  06 06 2002 4 46 45 PM CommandName  CON2  Time  06 06 2002 4 46 07 PM    15 Device State Change  14 Device State Change  13 Command Completed  12 Command Started   11 Device State Change  10 Device State Change    CommandName  CON2  Time  06 06 2002 4 46 0
53.  by default  Please 1   refer to your IT department when  connecting to the network  If you 2     have questions  please call  Luminex Technical Support     To change the computer name on Luminex 100 IS 2 3 systems   Change the computer name following the Windows process     When you reboot the system an error message appears warning  about database errors     Reinstall Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software using the Repair option   After the reinstall the database is available  you do not need to  reboot     P repa re System for After you install the hardware and software  run the following   F irst U se commands to prepare the system for first time use  Also  consider  running these commands when the system has been idle for extended  periods of time  Refer to Maintenance Procedures  page 5 92  for  command operation  Run the following commands in order     2 Backflushes  2 Drains  2 Alcohol flushes    3 Washes with water    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Installation Drawing       eoueJeo o 3  4   uuor est  l  g 009 k    A      BY 8 04     al S0 Z6  dAX xeuium   eoeung  Bunioddns  W   ge  x    c  e  z        i   gt  e  Oo  9 e  o o  c       FE     o        0       d     a   u    c         R    M8IA epis flH    M8IA 2uU1eulos            uuug 9Z  jsneux3  1  uug ioI  josoley M8IA YOR  DE   jq  ssod  exelu  uy Burooo ysneuxg exe  AV AN      a eyxelul Buljoo5 Buljoo9    jneux3 e   resp    m z x  BuljooD     gt  9                         8         eoueJeo o js i    ES      Kell dAX   wwg 0
54.  commands  and acquisition commands     PN 89 00002 00 07 1 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Create a New 9       Batch    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software        To import a template from a diskette or CD     p    2     5        Luminex Uatch Setup    Insert the kit   s diskette or CD into the appropriate drive     On the File menu  click Import Template  The Import  Template dialog box opens     Click the Look in drop down arrow and navigate to the diskette  or CD drive containing the template  The diskette drive is  typically drive A and the CD drive is typically drive D     The kit manufacturer   s template appears on the selection list   Click the name of the template     Click Open to load the template   To create a new batch     Read the instructions provided with the assay kit you are using   Follow the kit instructions for any preparations     Click New Batch  The Open Template dialog box opens     Double click the template you want to apply to the new batch   The template loads  and the Luminex Batch Setup window  opens  See Figure 5 27        Please establish the starting location for the batch and enter the appropriate patient information  Note    indicates a required field     inset  Acquire Patient v  X  1 Apply    r Batch Info                            x No Location Command   SamplelD  Dil  Factor   Name 8 1 A1 Plate Acquire Standard  Std M 1 va   petens 16 36 3 2 B1 Plate1 Acquire Standard  StdM       1 v   S 3 C1 Plate1 Acquire Stan
55.  custhelp com     Luminex Technical Support is available to users in the U S  and  Canada by calling 1 877 785 BEAD   2323  between 7 00 a m  and  7 00 p m  Central Time  Monday through Friday  Users outside of the  U S   Canada and Europe can call us at 1 512 381 4397 between    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Power Supply    xMAP Technology    7 00 a m  and 7 00 p m  Central Time  Monday through Friday   Inquiries may also be sent by email to support  luminexcorp com     Users in Europe can call us at  31 162408333 between 8 30 and  5 30  Central European Time  Monday through Friday  Email  inquiries in Europe can be sent to supporteurope    uminexcorp com    Power supply problems often involve a blown fuse  faulty electronic       P roblems component  or even something as simple as a disconnected cable   Use extreme care when you replace a fuse   Symptom Possible problem Solution       Analyzer will not turn on  or  XYP will not turn on     Fuses continue to open  blow      Communication    The power cord is disconnected  Verify that the power cord is    Plugged in   No voltage is coming from the Verify that the electrical outlet is  electrical outlet  operational   The power supply is faulty  Contact Technical Support   A fuse has burned out  See    Fuses    on page 6 11 for    instructions on changing fuses     A component has a short circuit  Contact Technical Support     The communication problems described in this section involve the  links between the data 
56.  display MFI  values on all reports  In the Luminex IS 2 3 software  the only report  affected by this selection is the Analyte Report  All others are hard  coded by the system     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Define Company  Information Tab    xMAP Technology    Auto Start Analysis  Select this feature to enable the software to  begin analyzing data immediately after processing batches  The  automatic analysis feature takes place after the system finishes  acquiring data while processing batches          Luminex100 15 Software   Options lol x   General   Company Information   Data Export      Default Batch Directory     CAMy Batches Eg     Current User    P    Analysis Display Digits   2   iv Display Confirmation Screens    Enable Raw Data Storage   I Report Raw Fluorescence   F Auto start Analysis       E    i       Figure 5 21  Options Dialog Box   General Tab    You can enter information about your company and a company logo  into the Company Information tab  This information is stored in the  Registry for reference  The logo will not alter any Luminex IS 2 3  report or screen     Company Information  name  address  phone and fax numbers  and  location of company logo      Use the browse button Em to navigate to the location where the  logo is stored     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Define Data Export  Tab Information    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software       General Company Information   Data Export      Name 
57.  for more information about the system monitor     Warning  The heater plate of the Luminex X YP instrument is hot  when in use and may cause burns  Do not touch the heater plate     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Calibration Procedures    xMAP Technology        To set the Luminex XYP instrument heater temperature     1  Click Eject Retract to eject the plate holder   2  Set the Luminex XYP heater block on the plate holder   3  Click Eject Retract to retract the plate holder     4  Inthe Temperature and Gauges area of the Run Batch tab   click Turn ON  The light on the button turns green and the  thermometer fluid turns red as it raises to reach the target  temperature     5  Use the up and down arrows beneath the target temperature box  to set the temperature you want the Luminex XYP instrument  heater block to maintain  The user definable heater range is 35 C  to 60  C     6  Wait for the heater to reach your selected temperature and  stabilize before processing samples  The thermometer turns  green when the temperature is stabilized     Calibrator xMAP microspheres are used to normalize the settings for  the reporter channel  both classification channels  and the doublet  discriminator channel  Control xMAP microspheres are used to  verify calibration and optical integrity for the system     Calibrate the system at least once a month and       Following installation    ifthe system is moved     ifa part is replaced     if the delta calibration temperature shown 
58.  none gt   Plate1   lt none gt   Platel Pending        4 Prim    lt none gt   Platel Pending  Wash Reservoir  Plate  Pending  5 Calibrate CAL1 E11  Platet Pending  7 Wash Reservoir  Plate Pending  8 Calibrate CAL2 F11  Piate1 Pending E  CTI ueni  T rm ama et  Region Events See    Figure 5 31  Processing Multiple Plates       After the first microtiter plate in a multiple plate batch has been  acquired  the system pauses and prompts you to insert the next plate         To process multiple plates during a batch or multi batch     1     Create the batch or multi batch  See    Create a New Batch    on  page 5 53 or    Create a Multi Batch    on page 5 58     PN 89 00002 00 07 1 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Re Run or  Recover  Incomplete Batch    Scan in Samples  With a Barcode  Reader    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    2  Insert the first plate     3  Onthe Run Batch tab  click Start Plate to begin processing the  batch  When the initial plate is through  the system pauses and  displays the Insert Next Plate message in red underneath the  sheath pressure gauge     4  Click Eject  then remove the acquired plate and load the next  plate for processing     5  Click Resume  The system resumes the acquisition process     An incomplete batch can be caused by situations such as a power  failure  software failure  marking a batch for deletion  or clicking  Cancel All  Use this procedure to re run or recover an incomplete  batch         To open an incompl
59.  officers  directors  employees  agents  successors and assigns  collec   tively the  Released Parties    with respect to the use of the Product  Buyer agrees to indemnify and  hold harmless the Released Parties from and against any suits  losses  claims  demands  liabilities   costs and expenses  including attorney  accounting  expert witness  and consulting fees  that any of  the Released Parties may sustain or incur as a result of any claim against such Released Party based  upon negligence  breach of warranty  strict liability in tort  contract or any other theory of law or  equity arising out of  directly or indirectly  the use of the Product or by reason of Buyer s failure to  perform its obligations contained herein  Buyer shall fully cooperate with the Released Parties in the  investigation and determination of the cause of any accident involving the Product which results in  personal injury or property damage and shall make available to the Released Parties all statements   reports  recordings and tests made by Buyer or made available to Buyer by others     Patent Disclaimer   Neither Seller nor Luminex warrants that the use or sale of the Product will not  infringe the claims of any United States or other patents covering the product itself or the use thereof  in combination with other products or in the operation of any process     End User License Agreement  EULA  for Luminex   Software    This Luminex End User License Agreement     EULA     is a legal agreement b
60.  on your computer equipment     4  RIGHTS IN SOFTWARE  All rights and title in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and any copies  thereof are owned by Luminex or its suppliers  This EULA is not a sale and does not transfer to you any  title or ownership interest in or to the SOFTWARE or any patent  copyright  trade secret  trade name   trademark or other intellectual property right therein  You shall not remove  alter  or obscure any  proprietary notices contained on or within the SOFTWARE and shall reproduce such notices on any  back up copy of the SOFTWARE  All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may  be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is the property of the respective content owner  and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties  This EULA  grants you no rights to use such content     5  EXPORT RESTRICTIONS  You agree that you will not export or re export the SOFTWARE PRODUCT  to any country  person  entity  or end user subject to U S A  export restrictions  You hereby warrant no  state or federal agency has suspended  revoked  or denied your export privileges     6  NOWARRANTY  THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS LICENSED    AS IS     ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE  PRODUCT IS AT YOUR OWN RISK  THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED FOR USE ONLY  WITH LUMINEX PRODUCTS  TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW   LUMINEX AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES  EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED   INCLUDING  BUT N
61.  sad Chee nee ends dau dada 5 35  Save and Load    cue e e REA E rs 5 36  Save Only    edu tet Rte d gd scan 5 36  Self Diagnostics           lese 5 36  Show Bead  scence saeit eai TER eee nee nee 5 36  Single  Step  ca GAG exea Sha Bh ONG Slane rcs 5 36  Skip  wells     44 er orb rehenes 5 36  Soak   sch waded a elds ws aA sea aid det aes SORE a eh eta deka Se 5 36  Start Analysis  e  ecra cee cere eee e 5 37  Start  Plate   usb EEE E a e dec en 5 37  StatiStlCS s ic Led deh ad ber CEU deor made e 5 37  Test Sort Orders    2 ix soi c e CU Rue VH DERE et 5 37  Validate Control    0 0 0 0    oc eens 5 37  Validate Standard    2    0    eens 5 37  View Batch Data        0 0 0    cee eee 5 37  Warmup esada i see s hes beer e Bea a eas hee a ee eae a 5 37  Wai seeen e cers wah na ase dient PERO Re e 5 37  ZOOM Leia dece dvo EROR ESSA ed  d cR eR Ca eee aes 5 37  Procedures   uu eod dee e AE A dave Reed ER er EUR 5 38  Using the Online Help         0 0 0 0    cece eee eee 5 38  Setting Software Options            0 0 00  cece eee eee 5 39  Define General Tab Information                    5 39  Define Company Information Tab                   5 40    iv PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Define Data Export Tab Information                 5 41  Setting up the Favorites List          llle esee 5 42  Startup Procedures        0 0    cece ee eee eee 5 43   Warm Up the System             0 0 0 0    ee eee 5 43   Prime the System       0 0    0    c eee eee eee 5 43   Backf
62.  sample acquisitions  Units 2 seconds        BatchAuthor   value      Optional  The name of the person who created the batch   Limited to 30 characters        BatchStartTime   date time      Optional  The date  amp  time that the batch was started        BatchStopTime   date time      Optional  The date  amp  time that the batch was finished        BatchDescription   value      Optional  The batch description  Limited to 200 characters        BatchComment   value      Optional  Comment entered after the batch has run           CALInfo   Optional  Indicates the start of the CAL1  amp  CAL2 machine  calibration information logged just prior to and anytime during  batch acquisition   CONInfo   Optional  Indicates the start of the CON1  amp  CON2 machine    verification information logged just prior to and anytime during  batch acquisition       AssayLotlnfo      Optional  Indicates the start of the Lot information for any  standards and or controls associated with the batch       Samples  num   MinEvents  0        Samples indicate the number of samples run in the batch   The MinEvents field is unused and will always be zero  Note  that this field is adjacent to the Samples field    Samples   28   Min Events   0    rather than below it to  maintain compatibility with previous versions of software           Min Events       See Samples field above       PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Table D 1 Field Definitions  Continu
63.  section     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Safety    Symbols    Please become familiar with the information in this chapter before  using the equipment  Do not perform procedures on your Luminex  100 IS 2 3 system that are not specifically contained in this manual   unless you are directed to do so by Luminex Technical Support     These symbols describe warnings  cautions  and general information  used in the operation of this instrument  These symbols are further  defined under    Safety Precautions                       Number Symbol Description Number Symbol Description  1 PN Alternating current  ac  7 A Warning  refer to manual   2    Protective ground 8 A Warning  refer to manual   3   On 9 A Warning  refer to manual   4 O Off 10 A Warning  refer to manual   5 SN Serial number 11 A Warning  refer to manual        BE             Warning  refer to manual                 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Warnings and Notes    Safety Precautions    xMAP Technology    Informational notes and warnings appear in this manual     Note  A note provides general helpful information  No safety or  performance issues are involved     Caution  This message is used in cases where the hazard is minor or  only potential hazard is present  Failure to comply with the caution  may result in potentially hazardous conditions     Warning  This message is used in cases where danger to the  operator or to the performance of the instrument is present  Failure
64.  standard Lowest  Right of Curve      max concentration standard Highest                   STDS          Median  Fluorescent  Intensity   MFI     Unknown B    Concentration   gt STDS    Unknown A  Concentration   lt STD1    Concentration    Figure 5 18  Non Competitive Assay    Examples of out of range sample labeling for competitive assays are  shown in Table 5 7  Figure 5 19 shows what a standard curve for a  competitive assay should look like     Table 5 7  Competitive Out Of Range Labeling                Condition Concentration Label MFI of Standard Referenced  Left of Curve  lt  min concentration standard Highest  Right of Curve    gt  max concentration standard Lowest                   5   26 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software         Unknown C  STD 1           Median  Fluorescent Concentration STO 3 Unknown D  Intensity   STD 1 Concentration          MFI   gt STOS        Concentration    Figure 5 19  Competitive Assay    The standards tab displays an Expected Concentration column for  standard and control samples  The Standards Expected Concentration  column allows users to edit the standard concentrations  You can edit  controls  however  you must select the control name or Expected  Concentration box for that control  then click Change Lot     When editing standard and control lot values the system may prompt  you for a new number  If this is the first batch you analyze using this  lot number
65.  the  designated plate well  To make a correction  select the wells   selected wells are outlined in blue   right click over the selected  wells to display the Command menu  and then click Clear  Selection from the list  Table 5 10  following  lists Plate Layout  selection shortcuts     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Acquire Data  CAL1  CAL2  CONI  CON2  Wash  Drain  Soak    JA MM UM    JA    Clear Selection    JA  JM Jt    Add Command Label s   Clear Command Label s     Insert Off Plate Cmd s   Clear Off Plate Cmd s     Preliminary Off Plate Cmd s        Figure 5 38  Plate Layout Tab Command Menu    11  Establish preliminary off plate commands  The system performs  preliminary off plate commands before the first well command   To establish a preliminary off plate command  right click  anywhere over the plate layout and select Preliminary Off Plate  Cmd s  from the menu The command list dialog box appears  similar to Figure 5 40     Click the OK button next to the Command List after you select  the desired commands  The white corner marker in the top left  corner of the plate  above the letter A  turns green to indicate an  off plate command is established  The selected commands run  before the plate begins         p         Preliminary Off Plate Cmd s   E X Clear Off Plate Cmd s     Bi VC MCCC MCCC  Figure 5 39  Preliminary Off Plate Command  Corner  Marker    To clear preliminary off plate co
66.  to  comply with the warning may result in incorrect performance   instrument failure  invalid results  or hazard to the operator     Danger  This message is used in cases where significant risk of  serious injury or death is present     Read the following safety information before setting up or using the  Luminex 100 IS 2 3 system  A user should be present during  operation  This system contains electrical  mechanical  and laser  components which  if handled improperly  are potentially harmful  In  addition  biological hazards may be present during system operation   Therefore  we recommend that all system users become familiar with  the specific safety advisories below  in addition to adhering to  standard laboratory safety practices  The protection provided by the  equipment may be impaired or the warranty voided if the system is  used in a manner not specified by the instructions or by Luminex  Corporation     This caution label appears on the back of the Luminex 100 analyzer  and on the Luminex XYP instrument     Caution   Double Pole Neutral Fusing  Disconnect power before changing fuse  Attention   Double pole fusible sur le neutre  Couper le courant avant de remplacer le fusible    Fuse  2    ULiseG   c  zarast   39m        Figure 2 1 Fuse Caution Label    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Safety    Do not perform any maintenance or cleaning of the system s  electrical components  with the exception of replacing fuses     Thi
67.  to perform  the firmware upgrade  Then  replace the serial interface cable  with the USB interface cable supplied in the upgrade kit    e Luminex XYP instrument    Continue to use the serial  interface cable between the PC and Luminex XYP     e Upgrading a Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 2 2 system   If you  are upgrading a Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 or 2 2 system       Luminex SD system   Remove the serial interface cable  between the Luminex XYP and the Luminex 100 analyzer   then attach it to the Luminex SD system to perform the  firmware upgrade  After completing the SD firmware upgrade   reattach the serial cable to the back of the XYP Then  replace  the serial interface cable with the SD interface cable  the  shorter cable  supplied in the upgrade kit  If you are upgrading  the firmware for more than one component  for instance  the  SD and the XYP   you must upgrade the SD system first      Luminex 100 analyzer cable   Continue to use the existing  USB interface cable between the PC and Luminex 100  analyzer     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Luminex 100 Analyzer  Firmware Upgrade    Connect Cable    Note  If you are not familiar  with connecting the cables  refer to Luminex 100 IS  System Setup  page B 1      Upgrade Firmware    xMAP Technology      Luminex XYP instrument   Continue to use the serial  interface cable between the PC and Luminex XYP     Follow the steps in this section to update and verify the Luminex 100  analyzer firmware     Perform the Lumine
68.  want to set options  A full  description of each tab and its options is listed below     3  After you have entered and selected all of your preferences  click  OK     You define the following options on the General tab     Default Batch Directory  Names the default directory to store  batch information  Click the browse button and navigate to the  desired folder  directory      Current User  Enter the name of the current user or operator  The  name appears on reports     Analysis Display Digits  Use this feature to customize the  number of digits shown on the Data Analysis dialog box and printed  reports  The data is stored with its full precision  that is  including all  digits   but the data appears as requested  The default analysis digit  display is for two digits to show in the analysis     Display Confirmation Screens  Enables confirmation dialog  boxes to display when you initiate many maintenance commands  If  you disable the confirmation screen display option  the confirmation  screens remain for commands initiated from the Home tab     Enable Raw Data Storage  Select this feature to save bead event  data that is acquired while processing batches in the database  The  system defaults to Enable Raw Data Storage  Raw data storage is  necessary particularly when you use file mode  Replay Batch      Report Raw Fluorescence  Select this feature to enable the  median fluorescence intensity  MFI  display to appear on the  Analyte Report  This feature was previously used to
69. 00 IS 2 3 Firmware Installation    The Luminex 100 analyzer  the Luminex XYP instrument  and the  Luminex SD system use firmware to perform internal control  functions  Although seldom required  firmware updates may become  available to enhance functionality  If you are directed to update the  firmware due to an upgrade kit or other enhancement  follow the  appropriate procedure in this section  There is a separate section for  the Luminex 100 analyzer  Luminex XYP instrument  and the  Luminex SD system  Review the following Firmware Upgrade  Cable Configurations  section  then continue with the desired  firmware upgrade section     e Upgrading a Luminex 100 Version 1 7 system   lIf you are  upgrading your firmware from a system previously using the  Luminex 100 Version 1 7 software  with Windows 98 or 2000      e Luminex SD system   lIf you have the optional Luminex SD  system  remove the serial interface cable between the Luminex  XYP and the Luminex 100 analyzer  then attach it to the  Luminex SD system to perform the firmware upgrade  After  completing the SD firmware upgrade  reattach the serial cable  to the back of the XYP  Then  replace the serial interface cable  with the SD interface cable supplied in the upgrade kit  If you  are upgrading the firmware for more than one component  for  instance  the SD and the XYP   you must upgrade the SD  system first      Luminex 100 analyzer cable   Use the existing serial interface  cable between the PC and Luminex 100 analyzer
70. 0002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Connect the Luminex 100  analyzer and Luminex  XYP to the PC    A    Caution  Due to the weight of  the analyzer  use two people for  lifting     Note  Do not place the PC or  monitor on top of the  Luminex 100 analyzer or  XYP instrument     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS System Setup    You must set up and calibrate the Luminex 100 analyzer and  Luminex XYP instrument before you can install the Luminex SD  system         To connect and power on the system     1     Install the PC and monitor according to the instructions provided  by the PC manufacturer  Place the monitor on top of the PC     Unpack the Luminex 100 analyzer and the Luminex XYP  instrument  Review Hardware  page 3 2  to verify that each  system component came with the system     Place the Luminex X YP instrument on a clean  flat surface to the  left of the PC        Figure B 2 Red Shipping Pin    Remove the red shipping pin from the X YP  Leave the silver  knob in the Luminex XYP instrument  See Figure B 2     Place the Luminex 100 analyzer onto the Luminex XYP  instrument  See Figure B 1 and Figure B 3 for positioning     Thread the alignment guide  translucent plastic tube  through the  opening on the Luminex analyzer into the Luminex XYP  instrument  See Figure B 3  Adjust the position of the Luminex  100 analyzer with the Luminex XYP instrument until the  alignment guide threads screw in completely     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Note  T
71. 1 PM  Time  06 06 2002 4 45 43 PM  Time  06 06 2002 4 45 43 PM  Time  06 06 2002 4 45 03 PM  Time  06 06 2002 4 44 56 PM  Time  06 06 2002 4 44 04 PM    Old State  Idle   Old State  Processing  CommandName  CON1  CommandName  CON1  Old State  Idle   Old State  Processing    New State  Processing  New State  Idle  CommandNo  1 of 1  CommandNo  1 of 1  New State  Processing  New State  Idle    Plate Location  C1  Plat  Plate Location  C1  Plat    9 Command Completed      Carmand Ctartad    4    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       Time  06 06 2002 4 44 04 PM    Tima   iR IQ Iani  AANS DNA    CommandName  CAL2    Carmmandilama  CAIA    CommandNo  1 of 1    Cammandnig 1 af 4    Plate Location  B1  Plat      Dlata   acatian  B4  Diac Ts       n                                                         dl       Figure 5 8  Diagnostics Tab    Use these tools to find information about the system and what occurs  during sample acquisition and other functions  For example  you may  look on the Message Log to see the last completed command or the  one currently in progress     The System Monitor provides information about the physical state  of the Luminex analyzer including lasers and system calibration  status  The values displayed are reported directly from the Luminex  analyzer and the Luminex XYP instrument  It shows whether the  calibration or control results completed successfully by displaying  green text for successful events and red text for failed events     Luminex 100 IS User Manu
72. 100 IS  Version 2 3  complete CN L007 01    system  with laptop                   Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology                                           Luminex 100 IS Documentation Version 2 3   CN M032 01    Manuals on CD    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN M01 7 01    North American    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN M0168 01    International English    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN MO031  01    Danish    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN MO01 9 01    French    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN MO020 01    German    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN MO030 01    Greek    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN MO022 01    Italian    Luminex 100 IS User Manual  Version 2 3 CN MO21  01    Spanish    Luminex 100 IS Developer Guide to xMAP CN M029 01   Technology Version 2 3   Power Cord  USA CN P001  01   Power Cord  Australia CN P002 01   Power Cord  Brazil CN P003 01   Power Cord  Denmark CN P004 01   Power Cord  Germany  Sweden  France  CN P005 01  Belgium  and Spain   Power Cord  Switzerland CN P006 01   Power Cord  Israel CN P007 01   Power Cord  UK CN P008 01   Power Cord  Italy CN P009 01   Power Cord  Japan CN P010 01   Power Cord  China CN P012 01   Reservoir  XYP CN 0022 01   Sample Needle Height Alignment Kit CN 0015 01    Sample Probe Alignment Kit    Short Sample Needle CN 0006 01   Long Sample Needle CN 0007 01   Sample Holder  Large  1 5 mL CN 0008 01   Sample Holder  Sm
73. 137    TemplateDevelopingCompany   Luminex    TemplateAuthor   MAC    SampleVolume   50 uL     DDGate   8000 to 15000    SampleTimeout   50 sec                           BatchAuthor     Name      BatchStartTime   7 28 2004 2 06 44 PM    BatchStopTime   7 28 2004 2 10 50 PM    BatchDescription   Software Testing                  BatchComment   Batch Comment for  Bead 22 Quant Batch   This field should be used for general batch information  entered by the end user        CALInfo       ProductName   ProductNo   LotName   ExpirationDate   CalibrationTime   BoardTemp   DDTemp   CL1Temp   CL2Temp     Pressure   DDVolts   CL1 Volts   CL2Volts   RP1 Volts   DDRVal   CL1RVal   CL2RVal   Passed   MachineSerialNo      Classification Calibrator   L100 CAL1   A4206   06 07 2006 12 00 00 AM   07 28 2004 09 39 32  AM   26 5625   25 26   25 04   25 26   6 3   74 04   81 33   62 83    1   556   719   450   True   LX10001298011BE       Reporter Calibrator   L100 CAL2   A4071   02 18 2006 12 00 00 AM   07 28 2004 09 43 01 AM   26 7795138888889      1  n 1  td   6 3    1 a   nef    590 5    1   o   1   True   LX1 0001 298011 BE       CONInfo     ProductName   ProductNo   LotName   ExpirationDate   VerificationTime   GatedBeads   MachineSerialNo   Passed      Classification Control   L100 CON1   A4153   04 13 2006 12 00 00 AM   07 28 2004 09 45 39  AM   5222   LX10001298011BE   True       Reporter Control   L100 CON2   A4137   04 06 2006 12 00 00 AM   07 28 2004 09 52 49  AM   4345   LX1000129801
74. 18   75            9   Std     925 292874765645   75            4   Std xI   3467 39037575852   75           5   Std xxl   3533 78728678387   75            6   Low Control   12 9976389750536   75            7   Patient 1   117 063202011273   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   2992 81871196887   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Avg Result         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std s   2 99 pg mL   75            2   Std m   15 79 pg mL   75            3   Std    126 71 pg mL   75            A   Std xI   61 6 93 pg mL   75            5   Std xxI   31 94 84 pg m L   75            6   Low Control   3 02 pg mL   75            7   Patient 1   15 98 pg mL   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   636 38 pg mL   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2              CRG       CRC32  A398CCAD       PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Index    A    access doors 2 7  3 9  accessories  see accessory instructions 6 11  accuracy precision  specifications 3 4  add sheath fluid 6 2  additional equipment  barcode labels 3 7  bath sonicator 3 7  printer 3 7  surge protector 3 7  vortex 3 7  additional software 3 3  adjust  sample probe vertical height B 8  adjust sample probe B 8  adjust sample probe height B 8  after running samples  releasing pressure 6 2  sanitize 6 2  wash twice 6 2  air connector 3 11  air intake 3 8  air intake filter 3 8  6 5  replacing 6 6  XYP 3 8  6 6  alignment discs B 8  analysis 5
75. 1BE   True       AssayLotinfo                                     ManufacturerName   ProductName   ProductNo   ProductType   LotName   ExpirationDate    LMNX   Quant Kit   200   Assay Standard   B22std   08 01 2006 11 59 59 PM     LMNX   Quant Kit   200   Assay Control   B22con   08 02 2006 11 59 59 PM                     C 8 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology        Samples   8   Min Events   0            Results            DataType    Median         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std S   57   75            2   Std m   525   75           3   Std I   4344    75         A   Std x    1 431 6   75           5   Std xxl   25694   75            6   Low Control   58   75            7   Patient 1   532   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   14567   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Result         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std s   2 99 pg mL   75            2   Std m   15 79 pg mL   75            3   Std I   126 71 pg mL   75            A   Std xI   61 6 93 pg mL   75            5   Std xxl   31 94 84 pg m L   75            6   Low Control   3 02 pg mL   75            7   Patient 1   15 98 pg mL   75   Sample Comment for Patient 1          8   Patient 2   636 38 pg mL   75   Sample Comment for Patient 2             DataType    Count         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes         1    Std s   75   75            2   Std m   75   75          
76. 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 Analyzer  Ventilation Filter    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    11   12     13     14          Maintenance and Cleaning    Hand tighten the screw on the syringe arm     Plug in the power cord and turn the Luminex 100 analyzer power  on     Prime the system twice  watching for any leaks in the syringe  area     When the prime finishes  close the center door   To clean the Luminex 100 analyzer ventilation filter     Disconnect the Luminex 100 analyzer from ac power by turning  off the power switch on the rear of the analyzer  then unplug the  analyzer power cord from the wall source     While facing the Luminex 100 analyzer  push your index finger  up under the right side of the analyzer  in the space between the  Luminex 100 analyzer and the Luminex XYP instrument   When  you feel the filter  push the filter toward the left of the analyzer   See Figure 6 6     Remove the filter from the left side of the Luminex 100 analyzer        Figure 6 6 Luminex 100 Analyzer Ventilation Filter    Clean the filter with a vacuum or with distilled water  Stand the  filter upright to air dry     Re install it with the arrows facing up  The filter should click  into place     Plug in and turn on the Luminex 100 analyzer power     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Annually  Sheath Filter    xMAP Technology        To change the Luminex 100 analyzer sheath filter     1     B1 9 mM    Disconnect the Luminex 100 analyzer from ac power by 
77. ARRANTY WHATSOEVER REGARDING  THE PRODUCT AND LUMINEX SPEFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES  EXPRESS  OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT   NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  NEITHER SELLER NOR LUMINEX SHALL IN ANY  EVENT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL  CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY                   KIND RESULTING FROM ANY USE OR FAILURE OF THE PRODUCT  EVEN IF SELLER OR  LUMINEX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE INCLUDING   WITHOUT LIMITATION  LIABILITY FOR LOSS OF WORK IN PROGRESS  DOWN TIME   LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS  FAILURE TO REALIZE SAVINGS  LOSS OF PRODUCTS  OF BUYER OR OTHER USE OR ANY LIABILITY OF BUYER TO A THIRD PARTY ON  ACCOUNT OF SUCH LOSS  OR FOR ANY LABOR OR ANY OTHER EXPENSE  DAMAGE OR                      LOSS OCCASIONED BY SUCH PRODUCT INCLUDING PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY  DAMAGE UNLESS SUCH PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY  SELLER S GROSS NEGLIGENCE              Buyer s Use of Product  Buyer agrees that no rights or licenses under Luminex s patents shall be  implied from the sale of the Product  except as expressly provided herein  and Buyer does not receive  any right under Luminex s patent rights hereunder  Buyer acknowledges and agrees that the Product  is sold and licensed only for use with Luminex s standard fluorescently dyed microspheres  Buyer  further acknowledges that the Product have not received approval from the United States Food and  Drug Administration or other federal  sta
78. C3  Con1000 1000  6390 850 1150 934 46 pgimL   D3  Con1000 1000  6874 850 1150 1028 27 pgimL   Avg  Con 100 806 87 87  1 587   pg mL   Con 1000                                  SS B Sequentially  by order acquired      pec   v Auto                      PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Figure 5 17  Analysis Window   Standards Tab Open    When a median fluorescence intensity  MFI  value for an unknown  sample or control lies outside the standard curve MFI range  the  concentration is not calculated  The unknown sample or control  result is reported as less than      or greater than   gt   next to the  corresponding standard expected concentration  The out of range  samples and controls will also have a    Sample High Low    statement  in the comment column  If a sample lies within the standard curve  MFI range  but the sample   s MFI value does not intersect the curve   the result will be reported as  Error   A    cannot calculate inverse  function  statement displays in the comments column  This error  condition usually occurs when a standard curve    flattens out  at the  high or low end  Examples of out of range sample labeling for non   competitive assays are shown in Table 5 6  Figure 5 18 shows what  a standard curve for a non competitive assay should look like     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Table 5 6  Non Competitive Out Of Range Labeling                Condition Concentration Label MFI of Standard Referenced  Left of Curve    min concentration
79. D    New York  Wiley Liss Inc   1995      There are two fluidic paths in the Luminex 100 analyzer  The first  path involves a syringe driven mechanism that controls the sample  uptake  This mechanism permits small sample uptake volumes from  small reaction volumes  The syringe driven system transports a  specified volume of sample from a sample container to the cuvette   The sample is injected into the cuvette at a steady rate for analysis   Following analysis  the sample path is automatically purged with  sheath fluid by the second fluidics path  This process effectively  removes residual sample within the tubing  valves  and probe   Approximately 160 uL of sheath fluid is dispelled into each well  following sample acquisition  The second fluidics path is driven  under positive air pressure and supplies sheath fluid to the cuvette  and sample path     The excitation system in the Luminex 100 analyzer involves two  solid state lasers  A reporter laser excites fluorescent molecules  bound to biological reactants at the x MAP microsphere surface  and  a classification laser excites fluorochromes embedded in the xMAP  microsphere  The lasers illuminate the xMAP microspheres as they  flow single file through the cuvette  RP1 refers to the excitation  wavelength  CL1 and CL2 refer to the dyes embedded in the  microsphere  DD refers to the channel that discriminates against  doublets based on size     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Microspheres    Software Overview 
80. Daily Shutdown Procedures             0 000000 eee eee 5 96  Sanitize the System      0 0    0    e eee eee eee 5 96   Run a Wash Command               0 0 0 0 e eee 5 96  Perform a Soak Command                   2004  5 97   Exit Luminex IS 2 3 Software                  0   5 97  Maintenance and Cleaning 6 1  Daily Maintenance    1 0 0      eee eee eee ee 6 1  Before Running Samples             0 0 0 0    eee eee 6 1  After Running Samples         0 0 0 0    0 ce eee eee 6 2  Routine Tasks  asses eck dee DOR dia tel REDE eel 6 2  Sheath and Waste Fluids                   0 0000 000005 6 2  Refill the Sheath Fluid Container                     6 3   Empty the Waste Container                    000  6 3  Weekly  ser bee uirtute eed pota eden tae 6 3  Visual Inspection    6 3  Run Self Diagnostics    0    0 0 00  cece ee eee 6 3  Clean Sample Probe         0 0 0    s cernes ee eee 6 3  Flush the System      0    0    eee eee ee 6 4  Monthly 12  eater decente ee eae eet 6 4  Clean the Sample Probe                0 0 0 0    200 6 4  Clean Exterior Surfaces    6 4  Calibration and System Controls                   000  6 5  Every Six Months    ou eed wad eee I Rd nce edet 6 5  Luminex 100 Analyzer Air Intake Filter                  6 5  Luminex XYP Instrument Air Intake Filter                6 6  5ynnpeseal     ece te er aai RE ao aay ERE TG 6 8  Luminex 100 Analyzer Ventilation Filter              us  6 9  Amnually   2 2 sek bnt ata Re eed qe ace debel Re bus 6 10  Sheath Filter 
81. H     Luminex100 Integrated System 2 3                     Favorites Daily Startup          Add Add  Template   Command        Fou              lo  xi cd Fi                me a    instrument Calibration    Gare Niger MO              eich Soup     E T    Reports and Analysis    E      me   Sy    Daily Shutdown    e                      New B                          5 CORREA TAT    VR ERR BSS HARA    CRR SER VIVECA VOIRE     Mig         Wido 05 5 5 0 0 0509 050000  1  Title bar 4  Tabs  2  Menu bar 5  Status bar  3  Tool bar    Figure 5 1  Luminex IS 2 3 Main Window    There are five major parts in the Main window  Title bar  Menu bar   Tool bar  Tabs  and Status bar  A brief description of each of these  components is shown below     The Title Bar displays the name of the software     The Menu Bar contains three menus  File  Tools  and Help menu  A  more thorough description of the Menu is shown on page 5 3     The Toolbar   has shortcut buttons for frequently used commands  A  more thorough description of the Toolbar is shown on page 5 4     There are five Tabs  organized by function  The tab that displays  when the software starts up is the Home tab  A more thorough  description of each of these tabs begins on page 5 4     The Status bar displays the system status at the bottom of the main    window  A more thorough description of the Status bar is shown on  page 5 17     5 2 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Menu Bar    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Lumi
82. High Limit            Test 54  mg dL  405                         Figure 5 45  Update Lot Information Dialog Box    Use this procedure to export a lot for use on another instrument   Depending on the template and its associated products  you may  have standards  controls  or both  Standards and controls can be  grouped into the same lot number         To export a lot from an existing template     1  On the Home tab  click New Lot  The Open Template dialog  box opens     2  Double click the template containing the lot to export  The  Update Lot Information dialog box opens  See Figure 5 45     3  Click Export Lot  A standard or control confirmation dialog box    opens verifying that you want to export the current lot for the  standard or control     If you want to export the lot information for the standards  click  Yes  If you only want to export the lot controls  click No  A  second dialog box opens to verify if you want to export the  current control lot  or current lot for a control     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Analyzing Batches and  Multi Batches    xMAP Technology    After responding to the confirmation dialog boxes  regarding  standards or controls  a Save As dialog box opens     4  Click the drop down arrow to select the Save in  location where  you want to save the lot information     5  Enter the lot file name into the File Name  box     6  Click Save  The system saves the lot     You can analyze an acquired batch using the analysis features of  Qual
83. If the  system controls pass  contact the  kit manufacturer        Sample High or Low The results do not fall within the  highest and lowest standards     The wrong control lot number  or target values are selected     Verify that you selected the  correct template     Verify that the correct control  lot number and target values  were selected and entered  correctly     Verify that the system is  functioning properly by running  the system controls  If the  sample is noted as High  dilute  the sample following the kit  manufacturer s suggestions  If  the sample is noted as Low   vortex the sample to ensure  homogeneity        Sample Timed Out The samples are concentrated     Not enough sample loaded into  the well     Sample probe is clogged     Verify that the samples are  properly mixed     Verify that you loaded the  correct sample volume to the  well     Remove and sonicate or flush  the sample probe to remove any  clogs     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Sample probe height is set  incorrectly     There is a clog in the sample  line     Troubleshooting    Adjust the sample probe height     Run the following commands   Backflush  Drain  Alcohol  Flush  and Wash     Verify that the delta cal  temperature is within   3 0  If  the system is not within these  limits  recalibrate  then retry       Sample Empty Detected    The system completely acquired  the entire sample volume     There is no sample in the  designated well     The probe is clogged     The sa
84. Luminex        Luminex 100  IS  User Manual Version 2 3        LUMINEX CORPORATION  2001 2005  All rights reserved  No part of this publication may be reproduced   transmitted  transcribed  or translated into any language or computer language  in any form or by any means  without prior express  written consent of     12212 Technology Boulevard  Austin  Texas 78727 6115  U S A     Voice   512  219 8020  Fax   512  219 5195      LUMINEX CORPORATION    Luminex amp  100    IS User Manual Version 2 3    CN MO017 01    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C  October 2005    Luminex Corporation  Luminex  reserves the right to modify its products and services at any time  This guide  is subject to change without notice  Although prepared to ensure accuracy  Luminex assumes no liability for  errors or omissions  or for any damages resulting from the application or use of this information     The following are trademarks of Luminex  Luminex  Luminex 100  Luminex 100 IS  LabMAP  xMAP   LumAvidin  Luminex XYP  Luminex FlexMAP  and Luminex SD  All other trademarks  including Windows     Cheminert  Pentium  and Dell are trademarks of their respective companies     The Luminex 100 IS software uses the VideoSoft   VsFlexGrid Pro 7 0  VsPrinter 7 0  and VsView 3 0  ActiveX controls  which are copyrighted by VideoSoft  2001     The contents of this manual and the associated Luminex software are the property of Luminex and are  copyrighted  Except as specified in the End User License Agreement  any reproduc
85. Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Startup Splash Screen       At the Luminex 100 IS Setup   Welcome dialog box  click  Next to continue     At the Luminex 100 IS Setup   License Agreement dialog box   read the End User License Agreement  EULA   Use the scroll  bar to display all the text  Click Yes to continue     At the Luminex 100 IS Setup   InstallShield Complete dialog  box  remove any floppy disks from their drives and click Finish   The system restarts Windows and auto starts the Luminex 100 IS  software     The first time Luminex 100 IS starts up it displays the End User  License  To continue click Accept  Uncheck the Show Next  Time checkbox to bypass this dialog box on the next startup  If  you click Decline the application closes     Start up software  The main screen of the IS software appears     Verify software upgrade information  From the Help menu  click  About the Software  The About Luminex 100 IS Software  dialog box opens  Verify that the version number on your screen  begins with 2 3  as shown in Figure B 16  The numbers after the  2 3 do not need to match those in Figure B 16     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 Version 1 7  with Windows 2000 to  Luminex 100 IS   Version 2 3    Archive  My  Sessions  folder    Remove Luminex  LMAT Software    Note  During the LMAT  software removal  error dialog  boxes may open  They are of  no consequence to the  uninstall  Just click OK or Yes  in response and continue with  the uninstall     PN 89 00002 00
86. MISTRIES OF THE ASSAYS  DEVELOPED BY BUYER AND METHODS OF PERFORMING THE ASSAYS  LE   THE PRO   TOCOL FOR THE ASSAY     Buyer has the responsibility and hereby expressly assumes the risk to verify the hazards and to con   duct any further research necessary to learn the hazards involved in using the Product  Buyer also has  the duty to warn Buyer s customers  employees  agents  assigns  officers  successors and any auxiliary  or third party personnel  such as freight handlers  etc   of any and all risks involved in using or han   dling the Product  Buyer agrees to comply with instructions  if any  furnished by Seller or Luminex  relating to the use of the Product and not misuse the Product in any manner  Buyer shall not reverse  engineer  decompile  disassemble or modify the Product  Buyer acknowledges that Luminex retains  ownership of all patents  trademarks  trade secrets and other proprietary rights relating to or residing  in the Product              Buyer s Representations  Release and Indemnity   Buyer represents and warrants that it shall use  the Product in accordance with Paragraph 2   Buyer s Use of Product   and that any such use of Prod   uct will not violate any law  regulation  judicial order or injunction  Buyer agrees to release  dis   charge  disclaim and renounce any and all claims  demands  actions  causes of action and or suits in  law or equity  now existing or hereafter arising  whether known or unknown  against Seller and  Luminex  and their respective
87. OT LIMITED TO  IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  FITNESS FOR  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  AND NONINFRINGEMENT     7  LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  IN NO EVENT SHALL LUMINEX OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR  ANY SPECIAL  INCIDENTAL  INDIRECT  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER   INCLUDING  WITHOUT LIMITATION  DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS  BUSINESS  INTERRUPTION  LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION  OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS   ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT  EVEN IF  LUMINEX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES     MISCELLANEOUS  This EULA is governed by the laws of the State of Texas  U S A   without reference to  conflicts of laws principles  You shall not assign or sublicense or otherwise transfer the rights or license  granted hereunder  by agreement or by operation of law  without the prior written consent of Luminex  and all  assignments in violation of this prohibition shall be null and void  This EULA is the complete and exclusive  agreement of Luminex and you and supersedes all other communications  oral or written  relating to the sub   ject matter hereof  No change to this EULA shall be valid unless in writing and signed by the party against  whom enforcement is sought  The waiver or failure of Luminex or you to exercise in any respect any right or  rights provided for herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right hereunder  If any provision of this  EULA is held unenforceable  the remainder of this EULA will 
88. Reservoir  Plate1 Succeeded  23 sec   3 Acquire Lstand     A1  Plate1  AILEI          5 Acquire C1  Plate1 Pending  6 XY Heater Off     nones  Plate1 Pending           Figure 5 6  Command Failure Notation in the Command List    Errors are recorded in the Message Log on the Diagnostics tab  See  page 5 9 for more information about the Diagnostics tab  Double   click on failed commands in the Message Log for additional  information  You can right click a highlighted row to copy data to the  clipboard or clear the batch from the screen     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Maintenance Tab Use the Maintenance tab to perform maintenance  XYP  daily startup   calibration  and verification commands to maintain your system and  keep it in optimal working order     tn Luminex100 IS Software    File Too help    mu Qu EMO    Luminex      Diaane Ac a Luminex100 Integrated System 2 3              Reservoir      ain   r   F          Figure 5 7  Maintenance Tab    See the Commands section starting on page 5 31 for detailed  information about these commands     Warmup   Prime  Backflush  Alcohol Flush  Sanitize   Wash   Drain   Soak   Self Diagnostics    Calibration Commands  CAL 1  CAL2  CON 1  CON2  New  CAL target and New CON target    Sample Probe Down  Eject Retract    PN 89 00002 00 07 1 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Diagnostics tab       x Luminex100 IS Software    File Tools Help    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Instructions for maintenance procedures
89. Select  The Luminex  Batch Setup dialog box opens  See Figure 5 34     5 64 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    3  Select the item that uses the dilution factor that you are setting   You cannot change any item that is grayed out or locked into the  command list        Luminex Batch Setup                                                                                                                 Please establish the starting location for the batch and enter the appropriate patient information  Note    indicates a required field   Insert  Acquire Patient    X fi Apply    Eaa m No  Location  Command Sample ID Dil  Factor  Name  8 1 A1 Plate1  Acquire Standard  Standard Conc 1 i y  Batch 6 3 02 10 36 8 2 B1 Plate1   Acquire Standard 1 E  Pi 5 3 Acquire Standard  Sta 1 Finish  Description  8 4 D1 Plate1 Acquire Standard 1   lt None gt  E 8 5   1 Plate1  Acquire Standard  Standard Conc 5 1   amp  6 F1 Plate1  Acquire Control Control Reagent il c i  H 7 G1 Plate1   Acquire Patient 3 ance  8 H1  Plate1   Acquire Patient 3  Created By  9 A2 Plate1   Acquire Patient 3 Ld   Names B2  Plate1_  Acquire Patient Dd uli   r Template Info e  Name  Help   auant                  Dese  1    Save and Load    Quantitative 5 Stadards  1 A yO  M New Lot  Control O Save only  7 r Standard Info  Expired   ied QO Product No  1  QO Product Name  Producti  Version No  Lot Name  A123456  Bzw        C Expiration Date  05 30 2002  VY r Control Info  Expir
90. Software    Opens the Open Batch dialog box  from which you select a batch to  analyze  Once you select the batch  the Analysis window opens     This command initiates data acquisition on New Advanced Batches  and New Batches using system templates  During acquisition  the  system draws sample from the microtiter plate for processing     This command enables you to display selected statistics for sample  data  There are eleven different statistics   CV  Trimmed 96C V   Count  Trimmed Count  Mean  Trimmed Mean  Median  Trimmed  Peak  Peak  Trimmed Std Dev  and StdDev     This command is in the Data Export Tab of the Options tab  You can  select Alphabetical by test name  Sequential by Region ID  or by  Template Setup Order      Alphabetical by Test Name   the tests are sorted by  alphabetical order     Sequential by Region ID   the tests are sorted numerically by  bead ID       Template Setup Order   the tests are sorted n the order set up  in template  regardless of name or ID     Opens the Validate Control dialog box  In this box  you choose to  validate all control tests  click Yes   or only a single test  click No      Opens the Validate Standard dialog box  In this box  you choose to  validate all control tests  click Yes   or only a single test  click No      Click to open a previously acquired batch that is stored in the  database  You cannot view New Advanced Batches     Warms up the system to prepare the optics prior to sample  acquisition  The system automatically be
91. The Command  List dialog box opens     w  Command List  dre x     Location   Reservoir       BackFlush   Drain   Sanitize   Alcohol Flush  CAL1   CAL2    CON1  CON2       Figure 5 24  Command List Dialog Box    5 42 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Startup Procedures    Warm Up the  System    Prime the System    2  Select the command that you want to add to your Favorites list   For certain commands  you will need to select the location where  you want to draw or expel fluid  Use the Location drop down  menu to open the microtiter plate image  Click on the microtiter  plate location on the image  Ensure that the location you select is  compatible with the volume intended for that location     3  Click OK to add the command  The command displays in the  Favorites list         To remove items from the Favorites list     Select the item you want to remove from the Favorites list  then  click Remove  The item disappears from the list     Warm up the system to prepare the optics prior to sample acquisition   The system automatically begins warming up when you turn power  on  This procedure takes approximately thirty minutes     Caution  Failure to properly warm up the system will effect assay  results and system performance     After four hours of inactivity  the status bar appears red and indicates  that the lasers are off  You need to warm up the system again by  manually initiating warmup         To warm up the system     Clic
92. The system calibrators are in the  wrong well on the plate     Vortex the control vials to  resuspend the microspheres     Verify that the correct lot  number and target values are  used  See page 5 46 for further  information     Verify that you placed the  control microspheres into the  correct well  See page 5 46     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Not enough control    microspheres added to the well     Control lot is expired     The sample probe height is  incorrect     The sample probe is clogged     There is air in the system     Possible problem with the  lasers     Troubleshooting    Make sure that you use at least  four or five drops of control  microspheres to the well     Use a new bottle of control  microspheres     Adjust the sample probe height   See page B 8     Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4     Run a prime and alcohol flush     View the system control trend  report  Check for dramatic  changes in temperature  sheath  pressure  or voltages  If any of  these situations are evident on  the report  Contact Technical  Support        Acquisition  Problems       Symptom    Possible problem    Solution       Acquisition fails or slows     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    The air pressure is out of range     The sample probe is not  vertically aligned    The sample probe is clogged     The sheath bottle has a leaky  seal     The sheath or waste lines are  not fully connected     The Calibration microspheres  have expired     See Pressurization on p
93. The system flags the failed sample so you may calculate the replicate  set s average without including the failed result in the equation     You can sort the batch samples Sequentially  by the order in which    they are acquired   or Alphabetically  by sample ID   Select the  sorting method in the Sort group box     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Commands    Acquire Patient    Add Batch    Alcohol Flush    Autoscale    Autosize    Backflush    CAL1   CAL2   Cancel  Command   Cancel All    Change Lot    CONI  CON2    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    This section describes the different commands used in the Luminex  IS 2 3 software  They are grouped Alphabetically    This command  which is part of the Insert command menu  adds  patients to the command list  After adding the patients you define the  Sample ID and Dilution Factor for each new patient  The Dilution  Factor defaults to 1     When creating a multibatch  adds an existing batch to a multi batch     Removes air bubbles from the sample tubing and the cuvette using  70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol  The alcohol flush takes about five  minutes  Uses the Luminex XYP reservoir due to volume  requirement     Automatically adjusts the maximum number of events shown on the  Y axis on the histogram  Click during acquisition to readjust the Y  axis scale     Automatically adjusts column widths to fit the data and header sizes     Removes obstructions from the fluidics pathways by d
94. To avoid  photobleaching  protect your  microspheres from light        xMAP microspheres hit the  lower right of the region     You may be using  photobleached xMAP  microspheres     Replace microspheres with a  fresh batch  To avoid  photobleaching  protect your  microspheres from light        Beads appear scattered      T  mr    There is air in the system     The sheath fluid is empty     Verify sample probe height  Run  2 3 Alcohol Flush commands     Make sure there is sheath fluid  in the sheath container  Prime  the system until all air is out of  the system        Microspheres appear as a long  diagonal line     The xMAP microspheres have  agglutinated     The solvent is incompatible     Add additional detergent to the  assay buffer  For example  add   02  to 0 1  Tween 20   Triton   X100  or SDS     View a list of incompatible  solvents at the Luminex  Technical Support website    http   luminexcorp custhelp com   If the solvent you are using is  listed  switch solvents     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    You are using incompatible  sheath fluid     Troubleshooting    Use only Luminex sheath fluid  in the Luminex 100 analyzer   Other fluids may damage your  analyzer        Error States    The following error states display on the Status Bar on the Run Batch  tab when an error occurs during system operation        Error Message    Possible problem    Solution             Disconnected The software hasn t made initial On the toolbar  click Connect   connec
95. age 7 3     Adjust the sample probe height   See page B 8     Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4     Make sure that the sheath bottle  lid is tightened  Remove and  replace the sheath bottle lid     Check to make sure all tubes are  tightly connected     Replace old microspheres with a  fresh lot     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    The calibration lot number  selected in setup is incorrect     Target values for chosen  calibration lot number are  incorrect     The wrong wells are selected in  the Setup XY tab     xMAP Technology    Enter the correct calibration lot  number in the Update CAL  Targets dialog box     Enter the correct target values in  the Update CAL Targets  dialog box     Ensure that the correct wells are  selected in the Run Batch tab        Slow or unsuccessful sample  acquisition    The air pressure is out of range   The sample probe is clogged   The sample probe is not  vertically aligned     Air is present in the system     The acquisition volume is set  too high     The xMAP microspheres are not  fully suspended     You are using photobleached  microspheres     See Pressurization on page 7 3     Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4     Adjust the sample probe height   See page B 8     Run three Prime commands   then resume sample acquisition     Set the acquisition volume to at  least 25 uL less than the actual  volume in your wells  This  setting lets the analyzer acquire  sample more efficiently with  less chance of acquiring air     Vort
96. ain compatibility with previous versions of software   Limited to 30 characters        Operator   value       The name contained in the Current User field on the General  tab of the Options dialog in the Luminex 100 IS software        TemplatelD   value           Optional  The database ID that is unique to the template  used to create the batch              PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Table D 1 Field Definitions  Continued        Field Name    Field Value Description          TemplateName   value      Optional  The name of the template used to create the batch   Limited to 30 characters        TemplateVersion   value      Optional  The version of the template used to create the  batch  Limited to 10 characters        TemplateDescription   value      Optional  The description of the template used to create the  batch  Limited to 200 characters        TemplateDevelopingCompany    value      Optional  The name of the company that developed the  template used to create the batch  Limited to 30 characters        TemplateAuthor   value      Optional  The name of the person who created the template  used to create the batch  Limited to 30 characters        SampleVolume   value      Optional  The sample volume defined in the template for  sample acquisitions  Units   microliters        DDGate   value      Optional  The DD gate defined in the template for sample  acquisitions       SampleTimeout   value      Optional  The sample timeout defined in the template for 
97. al Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    The system diagnoses real time system problems related to fluidics  and optics  The system also detects and reports if the Luminex XYP  heater block temperature is out of range or experiencing  unacceptable temperature conditions  including these items     e Luminex XYP heater block temperature time out      heat circuit failure      temperature out of range sensing      temperature change since calibration  or a change in channel    temperature    Table 5 1 defines the values listed in the System Monitor  These  values are useful for diagnostic purposes when communicating with    Luminex Technical Support     Table 5 1  System Monitor Values       Property    Value Units of Measure          Air Pressure    PSI  air pressure to the sheath  container from the air pump       Sheath Pressure    PSI  sheath pressure from the  sheath container through the  system       Delta Cal Temperature      C  temperature deviation from  the last calibration       Board Temperature      C  temperature of the analog  board       DD Temperature      C  DD temperature at the U  block inside the optics platform       CL1 Temperature      C  CL1 temperature at the U  block inside the optics platform             CL2 Temperature   C  CL2 temperature at the U  block inside the optics platform   XYP Board Temperature   C  temperature of the XYP  board inside the Luminex XYP  instrument   XYP Heater Temperature   C  temperature of the XYP          heaters inside the
98. all  1 2 mL CN 0009 01   Sheath Filter with Quick Disconnect CN 001 0 01   Sheath Bottle CN 0011 01   Syringe Cylinder with Seal CN 0013 01          PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       xMAP Technology    Software    xMAP Reagents    Training    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C                                                                            Product Numbers  Syringe Seal  Qty 4  CN 0014 01  Cable  USB CN 0018 01  Waste Bottle CN 0012 01  Luminex SD  Luminex Sheath CN S001  01  Delivery System   Product Description Customer  Number  Luminex 100 IS Version 2 3  Software CD  CN SW08 01  Product Description Customer  Number  Microspheres  LX100  CL1 CL2 Calibration L100 CAL1   xMAP Classification Calibrator   Microspheres  LX100  RP1 Calibration L100 CAL2   xMAP Reporter Calibrator   Microspheres  LX100  CL1 CL2 Control L100 CON1   xMAP Classification Control   Microspheres  LX100  RP1 Control  xMAP L100 CON2  Reporter Control   Sheath Fluid  LX100 40 50000  Product Description Customer  Number  Basic Training Course CN 0070 01             Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    8 4 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Glossary    agglutination    ambient temperature    analyte    analyzer    APD    background  noise     batch  bead    calibration    calibrators    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    The coalescing of small particles that are suspended in solution   these larger masses are then  usually  precipitated     The temperature of the surrounding environment     A subst
99. ance that is detected through assay analysis  Each test or bead  set will test for a specific analyte     This term is used to refer to the Luminex 100 analyzer     Avalanche Photo Diode  Measures the excitation emission intensity  of the color coding classification dye mixtures inside the  microsphere and the amount of light scattered as particles pass by the  lasers     That portion of a bead set result that can be attributed to excess  reporter molecules in the solution  nonspecific binding  or  fluorescent spillover from another fluorochrome     A group of samples that are processed using a selected template   Shorthand terminology for an xMAP microsphere     A process used to normalize the settings for the reporter channel   both classification channels  and the doublet discriminator channel  for the Luminex 100 IS  Calibration ensures optimal and consistent  microsphere classifications and reporter readings     xMAP microspheres used to normalize the settings for the reporter  channel  both classification channels  and the doublet discriminator  channel for the Luminex 100 IS     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    CL1    CL2    classification channel    control microspheres  assay    control microspheres  system    cuvette    data reduction    delta cal temperature    DD temperature    emission spectrum    event    excitation spectrum    fluorescence    fluorochrome  fluorophore    immunofluorescence    xMAP Technology    Refers to dyes embedded in the microspher
100. and load the first plate of the multi batch     Click Start Plate to being acquiring data from the multiple  batches in the sequence that you set up     Use this procedure to open an existing multi batch  Each batch in a  multi batch appears on the list of available multi batches  The  software differentiates them according to batch ID  name  and  description  The software gives all batches comprising a multi batch  the same multi batch ID number and name     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology        To open a multi batch     1     Click Open Multi Batch  The Open Multi Batch dialog box  opens  listing the available multi batches     Double click on the multi batch you want to open   Click Eject Retract to eject the plate holder   Load the first microtiter plate onto the plate holder     Click Start Plate to retract the plate holder and begin acquiring  the multi batch data     Process Multiple   You can process multiple plates per batch or multi batch  After  Plates   loading a batch or multi batch that spans more than one plate  a new  plate appears to the immediate right of the existing plate image on  the screen  A dark blue line separates the adjacent columns of the  two plates  You can use the scroll bar to see additional plates  See  Figure 5 31                       fi    ELLIT His O4   Home    Gun Batch ene D  Batch Name  Batch 3 20 02  13 42     Batch Description  Protein Demo      284 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12  1                2 Pnme  3 Prime     lt
101. arity with computers and  Microsoft   Windows    Commands are often available through  more than one method  such as from the main menu bar  the toolbar   or on different windows  However  each procedure in this manual  will describe only one method of accessing commands     This chapter has the following sections       Main Window   This section describes the main window of the  Luminex IS 2 3 software  including tabs and commands  Use this  section to become familiar with the main functions of the  software    e Secondary Windows   This section describes the secondary  windows in the Luminex IS 2 3 software  including the Analysis  Window and Batch Setup Window    e Commands   This section describes the functions of the  commands in the Luminex IS 2 3 software    e Procedures   This section describes how to perform tasks using  the Luminex IS 2 3 software     When using microtiter plates  use plates with wells that will hold at  least 185 uL  the extra 25 uL from the sample  plus an extra 160 uL  that is dispensed back into the well following acquisition      The Luminex IS 2 3 software starts automatically when you log into  Windows     When the first software User window opens  the Main window is  open  with the Home tab displayed  as shown in Figure 5 1    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    1 Sh Luminext00 IS Software frm   2 File Tools Hel Luminex  3 mE 3 E  7 AA a    mJ Single Step      Home   Run Batch   Maintenance   Diagnostics   Acq Detail   
102. ased  laboratory tests  measuring biomolecular reactions on the surface of  xMAP microspheres  This system is intended for general  laboratory use     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Technical Support    Luminex Website    xMAP Technology    Luminex Technical Support representatives are ready to help you   particularly when the system or software cause any questions or  problems  If the question or problem relates to materials from the  assay kit  you should contact the kit provider directly     Luminex Technical Support is available to users in the U S  and  Canada by calling 1 877 785 BEAD   2323  between the hours of  7 00 a m  and 7 00 p m  Central Time  Monday through Friday  Users  outside of the U S   Canada  Europe can contact us at  1 512 381   4397 between the hours of 7 00 a m  to 7 00 p m  Central Time   Monday through Friday  Inquiries may also be sent by email to  support luminexcorp com     Luminex Technical Support is also available to users in Europe by  calling  31 162408333 between the hours of 8 30 and 5 30  Central  European Time  Monday through Friday  Email inquiries in Europe  can be sent to supporteurope   Juminexcorp com     Additional information is available on the Luminex website  Search  on the desired topic or navigate through menus  Also  review the  website s FAQ section         To access Luminex website FAQ section   In your browser s address field  enter   http   luminexcorp custhelp com  This address takes you  directly to the FAQ
103. atch Summary Report   prints batch information in a sample  versus test grid format  useful for an assay developer to quickly  reference a test result for a particular sample     Calibration Trend Report   provides information about all  instrument calibration operations that occurred during the date range  entered by the operator     System Control Trend Report   provides information about all  verification operations that were performed during the date range  entered by the operator     Data Analysis Report   displays all the information available in the  Data Analysis window  You access this report through the Analysis  Window  For more information on printing this report  see page 5 89       To print a report from a batch or a specific time frame     Install the printer before initiating the print command     1  Click Print Report  The Report Selection dialog box opens        igi xi  m Select a report    Analyte Report C Maintenance Report  C Clinical Patient Report C Batch Summary Report    C Patient Summary Report C Calibration Trend Report          C Quality Control Report C System Control Trend Report    E Cancel      Figure 5 57  Report Selection Dialog Box          2  Select the type of report that you want to print and click Next   For the Analyte  Clinical Patient  and Batch Summary Reports   the Batch Selection dialog box opens  Select the batch to print   See Figure 5 58  For the Quality Control  Maintenance   Calibration Trend  and System Control Trend Reports 
104. ate sample lines and cuvette  after biohazard contact using 1096 to 2096  household bleach       daily if working with biohazards       monthly if not working with biohazards       Wash   As needed using distilled water    Four times after system calibration    Twice after sanitize    Drain e For troubleshooting and preventative   maintenance purposes only        drain the cuvette and refill in preparation for  running  Draining the system removes  debris from the bottom of the cuvette        when draining  you do not supply solution    Draining takes approximately two minutes   and should be followed by an alcohol flush   using 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol           Soak   Daily  at the end of the day for shutdown     To prevent salt crystals from forming in the  probe due to exposure to air  Soaking the  probe replaces sheath fluid in the probe with  water  The system uses at least 250 uL of  distilled water     Self   To verify system operation   Diagnostics             When draining  you do not need to supply solution  Draining takes  approximately two minutes and should be followed by an alcohol  flush with 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol     Any fluid that drains from the system drains to the Luminex XYP  reservoir as the default  However  you can set the system to drain to  any unused well on the microtiter plate  The drain function normally  expels 125 uL of fluid  Ensure that the location you select to expel  fluid has the reserve capacity to hold the volume expelle
105. ature     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    The DD temperature measures the doublet discriminator temperature   DD temperature shifting indicates a need for system recalibration  If  you have not calibrated  the arrows showing the temperature range  for the DD temperature both appear at the bottom of the  thermometer  and the thermometer appears in red  An out of range  temperature logs an error  but does not halt the acquisition     For information on setting the XYP instrument heater temperature   see page 5 45     The Command List displays commands associated with batches   new advanced batches or multi batches loaded for processing on the  system  The Command List shows the status of each command as the  system processes it  and whether the command completes  successfully or fails  Figure 5 5 shows that the first two commands  were successful  the third command is running  and the rest of the  commands are pending  Figure 5 6 shows that the third command  failed     CmdNo Command Plate Loc Cmd Status  1 XY Heater On   none    Plate1 Succeeded  0 sec   2 Reservoir Wash Reservoir  Plate1 Succeeded  23 sec               4 Acquire B1  Plate Pending  5 Acquire C1  Plate1 Pending  6 XY Heater Off  lt none gt   Plate Pending        Figure 5 5  Command List Section of the Run Batch Tab             CmdNo Command Plate Loc Cmd Status   1 XY Heater On   none    Plate1 Succeeded  0 sec   2 Reservoir Wash 
106. available  the appropriate Upgrade buttons will be  upgra de toa speci fic 1 enabled  To load an older firmware version  select the Browse button   z r   Lar Version   2 0 582  firmware version  then click iac   the Browse button and select PEELE  i      No device detected  Detecting      the desired firmware version 2 POSSEM  from the Open dialog box  BEES   Movement Device    To enable a connection to the SD device  connect the SD device to G   the host PC using the serial cable from the XYP and select the SD f  Movement 5   device radio button  C SD Device   3 c        XYP E f 21 15  Fmwaeisuptodte     Ius   I Browse  Status   4    _    1  LXR Runtime Version 4  Status of Upgrade  2  Luminex 100 analyzer firmware version 5  Movement Device SD Device selection button    3  Luminex XYP   SD instrument firmware version    Note  If you are upgrading the  Luminex XYP instrument firmware  consider doing it at this time  then  verify the Luminex 100 analyzer  and the Luminex XYP instrument  at the same time     Verify Successful  Firmware Upgrade    Update Interface  Cable    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Figure B 19 LXFirmware Update Tool Dialog Box    4  Click Upgrade adjacent to the Detector Device text box  The    Confirm LX100 Firmware Download dialog box opens  Click  Yes to continue with the upgrade  Click No to return to the  previous dialog box     5  The Download In Progress dialog box opens displaying the    progress  Read the information presented on the dialog box   W
107. board  then  connect the Y cable to the PC  See Figure B 5        1  Keyboard 3  Y Cable  2  Barcode Reader 4  Mouse    Figure B 5 Connecting the PC  Mouse  Barcode Header  and Keyboard    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Note  The sheath and waste  containers must be placed on the  same surface as the Luminex XYP  instrument  Do not place the  containers on top of the Luminex  100 analyzer     Install the Luminex XYP  Instrument Sample Probe    12     13     14          xMAP Technology    Connect the color coded tubing connectors to the Luminex 100  analyzer  Blue   sheath  green   air  orange   waste     Fill the sheath bottle with sheath fluid to just below the air intake  fitting  Place the sheath and waste containers to the left side of  the analyzer  Connect the blue connector to the sheath fitting   bottom fitting  on the sheath bottle  Connect the green  connector to the air fitting  top fitting  on the sheath bottle   Connect the orange connector to the waste fitting on the waste  bottle     Plug the Luminex XYP instrument  Luminex 100 analyzer  PC   and monitor power cords into approved outlets  We strongly  recommend using an uninterruptible power supply to protect the  system from power variations  Refer to Recommended  Additional Equipment  page 3 7  for additional information     To install the Luminex XYP instrument sample probe      Verify that the Luminex 100 analyzer and Luminex XYP  instrument power switches are off  Un
108. calibrator and control containers to ensure  homogeneity  Do not dilute xMAP calibrator or control reagents     2  Load a microtiter plate with at least five drops of each  CALI in  well Al  CAL2 in well B1  CONI in well C1  CON2 in well D1  and distilled water in well E1 through H1 to wash a total of four  times  Use different wells as necessary  To select different well  locations in the software  click on the drop down arrow next to  the entry cell for the calibrator or control  then click in the well  location on the microtiter plate image     3  Click Eject Retract  then place the plate on the plate holder     4  Fillthe Luminex XYP reservoir with a solution of 7096  isopropanol or 7046 ethanol     5  Click Eject Retract     6  Onthe Maintenance tab  click Prime  Click OK and wait for  the Prime to finish  about 1  minutes      7  Click Alcohol Flush  Click OK and wait until the alcohol flush  completes  The Device Status section in the status bar changes  from yellow to green and displays  Standby      8  Click New CAL Targ  to enter or confirm calibration lot  numbers in the Update CAL Targets dialog box  See Figure 5   25     9  Enter the CALI lot number and expiration date as printed on the  bottle  Enter the values listed on the Certificates of Quality   COQ  included with your calibrators into the CALI boxes  If  you are using a previously entered lot  select it from the drop   down menu in the Current CALI group box or click Import to  import the information  See 
109. ch uses a covalently linked fluorochrome antibody  complex to detect or quantify a particular antigen     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex xMAP  microsphere set    laser    microparticle    microspheres    multi analyte    multi batch    photobleaching    PMT    qualitative    quantitative    reporter    reporter channel  RP or RP1     RP1    RP    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex xMAP microsphere set    Luminex multi analyte microspheres containing a unique mixture of  two distinctly colored fluorochromes to distinguish them from other  multi analyte microspheres     Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation  laser    This highly purified source of light is an efficient way to excite  fluorochrome electrons     A solid substance with a diameter in the micrometer range  Often  used as a synonym for a microsphere     Polystyrene spheres with a diameter in the micrometer range  Also  called beads     Several assays or tests performed simultaneously in the same  reaction container     A set of batches to be processed consecutively     The process in which light absorption converts the fluorochromes  inside the beads into different fluorescent or nonfluorescent  compounds  Photobleaching prevents beads from being properly  classified     Photomultiplier tube  measures the excitation emission intensity of  the reporter dye bound to the surface of the xMAP microspheres     Pertaining to calculations that determine the absence or presence of 
110. commands  see     Validating or Invalidating Standards and Controls    on page 5 83  and    Change Lot  on page 5 85     In addition to the function buttons  you can choose to sort data  sequentially by order acquired  or alphabetically by Sample ID   These options are available in the Sort group box next to the function  buttons  These sorting functions are helpful in viewing batches  containing replicate samples  Replicate samples are defined as  samples with identical sample identifications  Replicate standards     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Errors Tab       Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    controls  and unknown samples are not always acquired in sequential  wells and thus make sample viewing difficult  When viewing  samples alphabetically all replicate samples are displayed together  with the replicate sample s average  AVG   then individual samples   If you view replicate batches sequentially  each sample displays in  the order it was acquired  followed by a replicate average summary  section     The Errors tab displays a list of errors that occurred during  acquisition  It organizes the errors in two categories  System and  assay errors  top section of tab   and Sample errors  bottom section  of tab  Table 5 5 lists the errors in each category    irai Estan           Quantitative Batch Test 1                Failed Control in Batch    Test 4    Sample Errors               A2  Sample HighiLow                        H1  Sample High Low          Hex
111. continue in full force and effect     EULA PN  89 30000 00 070    Contents    Introduction 1 1  About This Manual      0 0 0 0    eee eee eee eee 1 1  The Luminex 100 IS 2 3 System       0 0 0 0    00 00 0000 1 1   Intended Use  uela e bee ida ahaa yee aaa 1 1  Technical Support    0 0 0    cece eee 1 2  Luminex Website       0 0 0 0    eiee i Aea eens 1 2  Safety 2 1  Symbols         22s li ead head eR BERNER BERI RT UE et 2 1  Warnings and Notes          20      cece eee 2 2  Safety Precautions         llle 2 2  ECC Label  eder duode eut e d tud the 2 4  PIUIGICS EP eis aven wi sateedd andes tages 2 4  Luminex 100 Analyzer Laser                  00000005  2 5  Barcode Reader Laser    cece eee eee eee 2 7  Mechanical i645 bec olus e ede ne A 2 7  Biological   45 e dane ee COON ex dae ae awn 2 7  Heat   mm 2 8  Blue Indicator Light            0 0 0 0    eee eee eee ee 2 8   Decontaminating the Luminex 100 Analyzer for   Return Shipment          0 0 0    cece eee eee ee eee 2 9   The System 3 1  Theory of Operation     0 0 0 0    eee eee ee eee 3 1  Hardware  1212 eid h ea E laca Le eas 3 2  xMAP Technology Reagents           l leeeeeeees 3 3  Required Laboratory Reagents             0 0 0    ce eee eee 3 3  Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software        0 0 0    cece eee eee 3 3  Luminex 100 IS Performance Specification                   3 3   Noc PM  3 3  Accuracy and Precision           lslee eee ee eee eee 3 4  Se  sl  vity ro rrer du dddowsd ta d ueexe D e ee R DIE ee dede 3 4  Capac
112. cording to function     The Daily Startup group contains the Warmup  Prime   Alcohol Flush  and Wash Commands  For more information  on daily startup  see page 5 43  For more information on the  commands  see the Commands section on page 5 31     The Instrument Calibration group contains the CAL   CAL2  CONI  and CON2 buttons  For more information on  calibrating the system  see page 5 46  For more information  about these commands  see the Commands section on page 5   31     The Batch Setup group contains the New Batch  New  Multibatch  and New Lot buttons  For more information on  creating and running batches and multibatches  see page 5 51   For more information about these commands  see the  Commands section on page 5 31     The Reports and Analysis group contains the Analysis and  Print buttons  For more information on running reports and  analyses  see page 5 86  For more information about the  Analyses and Print commands  see the Commands section on  page 5 31    The Daily Shutdown group contains command buttons that  you can use when shutting down the system  For more  information on performing a daily shutdown  see page 5 96   For more information on the Sanitize and Soak commands  see  the Commands section starting on page 5 31     The Run Batch tab contains a microtiter plate and reservoir image     XYP and DD temperature readbacks  a sheath pressure gauge  print    button  command list displaying batch commands and their status   and plate and XYP command buttons 
113. ction rate  1 uL second  Sample uptake volume  20 200 pL    Reporter channel detection  A D resolution 14 bits  Communications interface  USB    Luminex XYP instrument  communications interface  RS 232    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Luminex XYP  Instrument General    Luminex SD System  General    PC Specifications    xMAP Technology    Ambient temperature  15  C to 30  C  59  F to 86  F   Humidity  20  to 80   noncondensing  Altitude  operation up to 2400 m  7874 ft  above mean sea level    Physical dimensions  44 cm  17 25 inches  W x 60 cm  23 5  inches  D x 8 cm  3 inches  H    Weight  15 kg  33 Ibs      UL installation category  UL Installation Category II  as defined  in Annex J of UL 61010A 1    Pollution degree  UL Pollution Degree 2  as defined in Section  3 7 3 2 of UL 61010A 1    Heater operating range  35  C to 55  C  95  F to 131  F  with  tolerance 0  C to  2  C    Input voltage range  100 240 V    10   1 8 Amps  47 63 Hz  AC inlet fuse  3 A  250 V   fast acting    Ambient temperature  15  C to 30  C  59   to 86  F   Humidity  20  to 80   noncondensing    Altitude  designed to operate at up to 2400m  7874 feet  above  mean sea level    Physical dimensions  20 cm  8 inches  W x 30 cm  11 75 inches   D x 24 75 cm  9 75 inches  H    Weight  9 kg  20 Ibs     UL installation category  UL Installation Category II  as defined  in Annex J of UL 61010A 1    Pollution degree  UL Pollution Degree 2  as defined in Section  3 7 3 2 of UL 61010A 1    Input voltag
114. d     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Run Self   Diagnostics    Using the Cleanup  Utility    xMAP Technology        To drain the system     1  On the Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract  Ensure that the  reservoir is empty  or insert a plate onto the plate holder     2  Make sure that the correct location is selected next to the Drain  button  Click Drain  A confirmation dialog box opens     3  Click OK  The Device Activity box on the Status Bar indicates  that the system is draining         To run self diagnostics        Onthe Maintenance tab  click Self Diag     2  Click OK  The system processes the various self  diagnostic  tests  When tests are complete  the Status Bar changes from a   Processing  command state to an  Idle  command state  The  self diagnostic tests should take less than one minute to  complete     If the self diagnosis fails  you can obtain detailed information  regarding the results of the self diagnostic test  See the following     View Self Diagnostic Details  section         To view details of the self diagnostics test that passed or failed     1  Click on the Diagnostics tab and view the Message log  If a  diagnostics test failed  an error message displays with a yellow  background     2  Double click the yellow row to see a detailed description  An  Errors dialog box opens showing a list of passed and failed self   diagnostic tests  Click OK to close this dialog box    Use the Cleanup Utility to     e Perform a disk cleanup  e Delete the
115. d    Table Background  This is the color used in filling the table s  rectangle  Currently  this feature is not used    Table Foreground  This is the color used in bounding the  table s rectangle  and for the text inside the table  Currently   this feature is not used     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Test 36 Customization    3 xj    General   Axis   Font   Color   Style           Grapl       Desk Background a a  si  O B E E  LJ  n    LIMEN TCI    C Graph Foreground        C Graph Background     Table Foreground     Table Background                Cancel   Original   Export      Maximize       Figure 5 50  Customization Dialog Box   Color Tab         Style Tab   use the Style tab for control of subset color  subset  line type  and subset point type  Subset 1   line type  and Subset  2   data point  See Figure 5 51     Test 36 Customization    X     General   Anis   Font   Color   Style      Subset 2    ee   om    Point Type   e Solid Circle           Line Type  Lass          Cancel   Apply Original   Export      Maximize     Figure 5 51  Customization Dialog Box   Style Tab           To modify features using the Graph Menu     Most of these menu items provide a shortcut for many of the features  provided in the Customization dialog box  Refer to page 5 77 for  details     1  Right click anywhere in the graph on the Standards tab  The  graph menu opens  See Figure 5 52     2  Select the desired menu item from the list and it 
116. d  well or reservoir on the plate  Click OK  Perform this step twice     6  Check that the Luminex XYP instrument sample probe has been  vertically aligned for the plate used in the kit     After Running Samples     After running samples     Refer to    Maintenance Procedures  on page 5 92 for detailed  Sanitize and Soak command operation     1  Sanitize with a 10  to 20  household bleach solution   2  Run two Wash cycles with distilled water   3  Soak with distilled water  Wait until the soak completes     4  If desired  turn off the Luminex 100 analyzer     Routine Tasks    Sheath and Waste Fluids Replace the sheath fluid and empty the waste container as required   You must manually monitor waste container levels  The Run Batch  tab displays a warning when you need to refill  or replace  the sheath  fluid container  See Figure 6 1                    File Toole Help  JmxQ4NI   549  Home  Run Batch   Maintenance  Tm Luminex100 Integrated System 2 3      No Batch Loaded      N  v       10 11 12 XYP Htr Temp DD Temp  OOC 65 5 3  60  55 we  45  0     000001000E  OOOOOOQC  OOOOOOQC  00000000C  OOOCOOOOCB  OOCOOCOQCs  OOCOCOOCs  OOCOOOOQOQ                     Cmd No command Plate Loc Cmd Status  h A1 Flatel Succeeded  23 sec        Toti EvenisiSee  Sheath Empty  Standby idina  Wemed  p o    Figure 6 1 Refill Sheath Fluid Warning  Circled in Photo     6 2 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Refill the Sheath  Fluid Container    Empty the Waste  Container    Note  There 
117. d Patient List  The Open Patient List File dialog box  opens     4  Double click on a patient list text file to append to the batch  The  patients from that list append to the first unassigned available  well  If all patient IDs in the batch or multi batch are identified   the system appends the patient list to the first empty location  after the batch s or multi batch s last command list activity  If  any of the acquire sample commands within the template of the  batch has an unassigned value  the system applies the first patient  ID in the list to the unassigned sample acquisition command  The  system appends any remaining patient IDs to the end of the  command list in order as they appear in the patient list     5  Choose whether to save the batch or multi batch for later use   Click Save only to save the batch or multi batch  To run it after  you finish creating it click Save and Load     6  Click Finish  The system saves the batch or multi batch for later  use or it loads it for immediate use according to the decision you  made when creating it     Use this procedure to open a previously processed batch and correct  the batch s sample names and dilution factors  You can delete a  sample from a batch  If you change the patient information in a batch  including those imported from a patient list  the system automatically  notes the change in the comments box of the sample table within the  database     While editing the database  the system marks the changes you make  in r
118. d instructions on  using a feature in the Luminex IS 2 3 software     Opens a dialog box in which you select a calibration file that  contains calibration lot information to import to use for calibrating  the analyzer     Opens a dialog box in which you select a control file that contains  control lot information to import for use when verifying calibration     Opens up the Import Template dialog box  from which you select a  template to import for use in a batch     This combination menu command on the Batch Setup window  allows you to add a user defined number of patients to the command  list  or skip a defined number of wells on the microtiter plate  The  two options on the menu are Acquire Patient and Skip     Invalidates or removes a control from the data analysis  Luminex  does not recommend invalidating controls     Removes a standard from the data curve  Use this command if doing  so improves the curve fit  Use caution when doing so because  invalidating a standard will greatly affect the curve fit and  subsequently the sample results     Opens the Open Patient List File dialog box  from which you select a  patient list text file to append to a batch     Toggles the x axis scale on the histogram or dot plot between  logarithmic and linear modes     Toggles between maximum and minimum histogram and dot plot  views     This command is found in the Analysis window  Use this command  to view the next test in the batch     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    New Adva
119. d or control you  want to validate or invalidate  See Figure 5 54  Select the desired  menu item to apply  When invalidating  the Name box turns red  with an asterisk proceeding it  When validating  the Name box  reverts to black text          Invalidate Control  Invalidate Control  All Tests     Invalidate Standard  1 Invalidate Standard  All Tests        Validate Control  Validate Control  All Tests     Validate Standard  Validate Standard  All Tests        Invalidate Standard Invalidate Control       Validate Control    Validate Standard       1  Menu for multiple tests 2  Menu for single test  Figure 5 54  Invalidate and Validate Shortcut Menus    2  Click Recalc to recalculate the results if the Auto option was not  selected         To validate or invalidate a standard or control entry using the  Invalidate and Validate Buttons     1  Select the desired standard or control name in the Standards or  Controls grid     2  Click the appropriate buttons at the bottom of the Analysis  window  Invalidate Standard  F4   Validate Standard  F5    Invalidate Control  F6   or Validate Control  F7      PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    3  The appropriate Standard or Control dialog box opens  To  invalidate or validate all tests click Yes  For only the single test  click No  When invalidating  the Name box turns red with an  asterisk proceeding it  When validating  the Name box reverts to  black text     4  Click Recalc to recalculate th
120. dard  StdL 1 Finish  Description     4 01  Plate  Acquire Standard StdL L 1    None     3 5 E1 Platel Acquire Standard  Std XL   1 X  ij GIF1 Plate1 Acquire Standard  Saxl   1 Conca  A a 7 G1 Plae1 Acquire Control  ConL 1  3 8H1 Plate1 Acquire Control  Con   1  Created By  9 A2 Platel Acquire Patient 2 L      Name   1062  Plate1 Acquire Patient 2 Load Pa List  11 C2  Plate1_ Acquire Patient 2  Template Info 12 D2  Plate1   Acquire Patient 1  13 E2  Plate   Acquire Patient 1 e  Name  14 F2 Plate1 Acquire Patient   1 Help   B3 Repatassay   15  G2 Plate1 Acquire Patent   1 lel       Description  1 2 2    4 8 6 7  0  9  10 10 12    Save and Load  Raplicate Simplax Quant r 22      5 rem UE New Lot    9 0 0 0  09 0  0 9 4 r Standard Info  F  AOCGCOCOCOCOCOCOC   Product No    3000    Product Name 36 RepOt Kit    Version No  Lot Name  36Repotsed  SERRE                         Expiration Date  06 10 2005    Control Info  Developing Co  Product No  3000  Product Name  36 Repat Kit   mny Lot Name 38RepQtcon          Expiration Date 08 10 2005    Figure 5 27  Luminex Batch Setup Window    Enter the batch name  if different from the default name   a  description  optional   and the creator s name  optional      Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Note  If any of the acquire sam   ple commands within the tem   plate of the batch has an  unassigned Sample ID  the sys   tem applies the first patient ID in  the list to the unassigned sample  acquisition command  The sys   tem appends an
121. dialog box opens  See Figure 5 28  If you do  not want to add a patient list to the batch  skip to step 11       pen Patient List File    Look in   a Common    e    Ex E3     ExportedT emplates   s  BrowseDB ocx    s  cbMsgbox ocx    E  crviewer dll    s  Datalnterpretation2 ocx  E GenFormulaDisplayLib ocx   x  GraphObjects  dll   E Graph  bjectsInterface  dil    My Documents E IVD_CalReport ocx    E          My Network P             21x   E  IVD  ConReport ocx E  IVDImplements  dll  E  IVD  CPReport ocx E  IVDInterfaces ll  E IVD  L VJTReport oc   E IVDinterpGraph o  El I  D_MainReport ocx El IVDinterpGraphD   E  IVD  PSReport ocx E  IVDMachineCalib   E  IVDBackup ocx  E  IVDMath dli  E  IVDBeadSelect ocx E  IVDMathCommon  E  IVDDevice  dll E  IVDMathE sp dll  is  IvDGraphwWrapper oc   E IVDMathlnterface        i  ion Flenm       rz       Open as read only       Figure 5 28  Open Patient List File Dialog Box    11  Select a patient file to append to the batch and click Open  The  system appends the patients to the batch     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Open a Batch    Copying and  Exporting Batch  Data    Clear a Batch from  the System    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    12     13     14     15     Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    If all patient IDs in the batch are identified  the system appends  the patient list items to the first empty location following the  batch s last command list activity  See    Add a Patient List  on  page 5 62 for information re
122. e  Also see classification  channel     Refers to dyes embedded in the microsphere  Also see classification  channel     A specific range of wavelengths in which light intensity is measured   Includes the emission of a given classification dye  Classification  channels are abbreviated as CL1 and CL2     Used to verify standards within the kit  Tells you that the curve or  thresholds are correct     xMAP microspheres used to verify the calibration and optical  integrity for the Luminex 100 analyzer     Principal fluid pathway within the optics component of the system  through which the sample is read     The analysis of acquired batch data     The difference between the current temperature of the Doublet  Discriminator APD and its temperature at your last calibration  The  system displays this value on the Diagnostics tab within the software     The current temperature of the doublet discriminator avalanche photo  diode     Wavelength range that an excited fluorochrome emits when its  electrons fall from a higher to a lower energy state  Expressed in  nanometers  nm      Occurs when the signal processor determines that a particle is being  observed  Referred to as one bead as it passes through the laser     Wavelength range that excites a molecule   s electrons to a higher  energy state  Expressed in nanometers  nm      Light emission that occurs when the electrons of a fluorochrome  drop to a lower energy state     A fluorescent molecule   See fluorochrome     A technique whi
123. e cleared batch if it has not been run  by clicking Open Batch        l     To clear a batch from the system     Right click on the area to clear     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Replay a Batch    xMAP Technology    2  Click Clear in the dialog box     3  Click Yes to confirm that you want to clear the batch     You can reprocess batches through the system multiple times using  Replay Batch  Replay Batch uses the data stored in the run files from  the initial acquisition to reprocess a batch  creating a new batch  output file     Each time you reprocess a batch using Replay Batch  the system  handles it as if it is a new batch  thus  creating a separate processed  batch entry and output file  The initial batch data and output file  always remain intact and unchanged     You reprocess a batch using Replay Batch to     e Run as demonstrations to see how the system processes samples  and analyzes the results    e Testa batch using different parameters  such as setting a different  number of events to be collected or using a different bead map or  new formula for analysis  also using a different template The  number of beads for collection must be less than or equal to the  number of previously collected in the original sample     If you reprocess a batch with the same template parameters in a  different template  the system obtains results identical to the original  batch  If you reprocess a batch using changed parameters  the system  may obtain different results  W
124. e range  100 240 V    10   0 4 Amps  47 63 Hz  AC inlet fuse  2 Amp  250 V   time lag    For systems using a PC  A Dell OptiPlex GX280 or Dell Optiplex  GX520  or newer PC  is shipped with the Luminex 200 system  For  systems using a laptop  a Dell D610 Notebook is shipped with the  system  Microsoft   Windows   XP is pre installed on the computers   The power requirements are 115 230 V   6 Amps  50 60 Hz    For updated information regarding the PC  notebook  or operating  system  go to http   www luminexcorp com  then click on the  Support link to open the FAQ list     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Recommended Additional  Equipment  Uninterruptible    Power Supply   UPS     Surge Protector    Printer    Barcode Labels  Vortex    Bath Sonicator    System Overview    Electronics    Power Input  Module    Communications  Ports SB9 PIN     Luminex 100  Analyzer  Ventilation Filter    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    The System    Luminex highly recommends using an uninterruptible power supply   UPS  to protect your system from power outages  Choose one that  can provide 1050 Watts for at least 45 minutes  The UPS should be  UL listed  CSA certified  and CE marked when used internationally     If you do not use a UPS  use a surge protector  Choose a protector  that meets your needs  Factors to consider include electrical  environment  endurance  suppressed voltage rating  and method of  protection  It should have six outlets  rated at least 1500 Watts  and  be UL li
125. e results if the Auto option was not  selected     Change Lot Use the Change Lot command to edit the lot that is applied to the  batch currently opened in data analysis         To change the lot to another available lot     1  Click Change Lot  Alt   F8   located at the bottom of Analysis  window  to display the Choose Lot dialog box  See Figure 5 55     2  The dialog box displays a list of available standard and control  lots that you can apply to a batch  Highlight the desired lot and  click OK to apply the selected lot to the batch opened in data  analysis  Figure 5 55 shows standard and control  Figure 5 56  shows standard only     Choose Lot       The following is a list of lots that are available to apply to this batch   Please choose the lot that you wish to apply        Standard Lots for Product  Control Lots for Product   B3638 Qt Kit B3638 Qt Kit  ud zi on Edited  ID 16     fghfgfghf  ID 9  B3538Con  ID 8   B3638Std  ID 7        Note    indicates the lot that is set as the current lot for new batches     OK   Cancel      Figure 5 55  Choose Lot Dialog Box   Standard and Control          PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 5 85    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Choose Lot    The following is a list of lots that are available to apply to this batch   Please choose the lot that you wish to apply        Standard Lots for Product   B21Lum Qual         B21LQStd  ID 6     Note    indicates the lot that is set as the current lot for new batches     Cancel  
126. e the old PC  and set aside  Place the new PC in place     Connect the monitor  power  and Com cables to the new PC     Install the keyboard into a USB port     Connect the barcode reader to the back of the PC  Connect the  mouse to the mouse port  Continue with the Install Luminex 100  IS 2 3 Software section     To install the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software     Turn on power to only the PC and monitor  switches are on the  front   The system starts up Windows     Log into Windows as local Administrator     a   In the Welcome to Windows dialog box  press Ctrl Alt   Delete     b   In the Log On to Windows dialog box  enter Administrator  in the User Name box  In the Password box  enter the  Administrator password  If you do not know it  see your IT  representative or contact Luminex Technical Support  In the  Log on to box  select the name of your local machine from  the scroll list     c   Click OK to complete the log on procedure   d   Verify that all applications are closed   Insert the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software CD into the drive  The    CD autoplays and in a few moments displays the Luminex 100  IS 2 3 splash screen  See Figure B 15     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Note  If the system displays a blank  screen after it has rebooted  press  Alt Tab on the keyboard to display  the software on the monitor     Verify Successful  Upgrade    xMAP Technology    Luminex100 IS 2 3        Luminex        1996 2004 Luminex Corporation   All rights reserved     Figure B 15 
127. e using an  SD  see Appendix D of this  manual     Fluid leaks can result in poor pressurization and failed sample    acquisition        Symptom    Possible problem    Solution       Pressure too low    The sample probe is clogged     The syringe seal leaks     The syringe valve leaks    Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4     Replace the syringe seal  See  page 6 8    Hand tighten the syringe  connection  silver knob  on the  syringe valve  Run a Prime  command  If leaks continue  call  Technical Support        Large amount of fluid pooled  around instrument     Fittings or fluid lines are  damaged     Call Technical Support        Fluid dripping from the  sample probe     The sample probe is clogged     The sample three way valve is  faulty     Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4     Contact Technical Support     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Fluid is leaking from the front  of the analyzer     The syringe seal leaks     The syringe valve leaks     Troubleshooting    Replace the syringe seal  See  page 6 8     Hand tighten the syringe  connection   silver knob  to the  white syringe valve  Run a  Prime  If leaks continue  contact  Technical Support        Sample Probe    Problems with the sample probe can lead to fluid leaks and  pressurization problems  as well as inhibit sample acquisition        Symptom    Possible problem    Solution       Sample probe leak    Sample arm is stuck in the up  position     The sample probe is clogged     The system is
128. e wrong Verify that you are using the  template  correct template  See Importing  Templates on page 5 52     You are using incorrect lot Verify that you have entered the  information  correct lot information  See  page 5 46     There is a problem with the kit    Run system controls  If they  pass  contact the kit  manufacturer        Luminex SD  Problems    Filter    Malfunction    Draining the Reservoir    If the empty sheath fluid container is not replaced and the system  continues to operate  the Luminex SD system eventually vents  pressure to prevent air from being introduced into the Luminex 100  analyzer  This may interrupt a sample and prevent further samples  from being collected     If the filter attached to the sheath intake line becomes clogged from  extended use  an alarm will sound even though the bulk sheath  container is not empty  If this happens  contact Luminex Technical  Support for a replacement filter     If the alarm sounds even though the bulk sheath container has fluid  and the sheath filter is in good condition  the system is reporting a  malfunction  If this happens  contact Luminex Technical Support     If you need to ship the Luminex SD system back to Luminex  Corporation  drain the reservoir before you pack the system  Call  Technical Support for additional information     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Verification    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Troubleshooting        To verify your system from the Maintenance tab     1     2   
129. eak     Make sure the lines between the  sheath and waste bottles and the  analyzer are fully connected     Remove and retighten the  sheath bottle cap     Inspect the fittings to be sure  they form a tight seal     Check for system leaks     Run a Prime command  If you  do not hear the compressor turn  on  call Technical Support     Ensure that the fitting connects  tightly above the sample probe   below the blue light     See  Fluid Leaks  on page 7 4     Disconnect the sheath and waste  bottle connections from the  analyzer  Run a Prime  Command  If pressure builds   remove and retighten the sheath  fluid bottle cap  then reconnect  fluid lines to the analyzer  If  pressurization fails again   replace the sheath bottle        PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Pressure too High    Fluid Leaks    Problem internal to the  instrument     The sheath bottle 1s overfilled     Regulator not adjusted properly     xMAP Technology    Determine if the problem is with  the analyzer or the SD or bottles  by disconnecting the sheath line  from the analyzer and running a  prime  Check the air pressure on  the Diagnostic tab  If air  pressure builds  the problem is  with the SD or sheath fluid  bottle     Ensure that the sheath bottle is  not filled above the fill line     If using bottles  open the center  door on the Luminex analyzer   Use a screwdriver to adjust the  regulator to fit in the center of  the green region on the Run  Batch tab  If you ar
130. ed        Field Name Field Value Description          Results    This field has no associated value  It is used to indicate the  beginning of the statistical results section of the  OUTPUT CSY file        DataType   type       This field is the name of the statistic represented in the  Sample  versus the Test data block immediately below this  field   Possible values for DataType include  Median  Result   Count  Mean   CV  Peak  Std Dev  Trimmed Count  Trimmed  Mean  Trimmed  CV  Trimmed Peak  Trimmed Std Dev  and  Avg Result  See Table 2   Statistics Definitions       CRC Entry        Optional  CRC indicator for the file data  Used to detect  external changes to the file           Statistics Definitions    Statistical calculations are performed for each test in each sample   The number of events to collect for each test in a sample is defined in  the template from which the batch was created  In any equations  listed below  N indicates the number of events that were collected for  an individual test in a single sample  The trimmed distribution  represents the events that were collected for an individual test in a  single sample with the lowest 5  and highest 5  of the data points  removed to help eliminate outliers     Table D 2 Statistics Definitions       Statistic    Description          Median    The middle value in the distribution of data       Result    The final test result based on a qualitative or quantitative analysis  This value  could have units associated with 
131. ed   Developing Co  C  Product No  1  P g    m Product Name  Productt    uminex 9  Lot Name  A123457  Expiration Date  05 30 2002                         Create a New    Advanced Batch    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Figure 5 34  Luminex Batch Setup for Dilution    4  To change the dilution factor  click the Dil  Factor field  The  white background indicates that you can enter text  Enter each  dilution factor as a decimal  not as a ratio     5  Click Finish  The system saves the information you entered     Use New Advanced Batch to acquire data without creating a  template  It writes raw data results to a simple csv file format  You  can define parameters for samples  gates  regions  events  on plate  and off plate commands  This feature does not store the results in the  Luminex System database or allow you to perform data analysis on  acquired batches  The Luminex analyzer uses only the 100 region  bead map  However  in the Acquisition Detail tab  you can view the  data for 25  50  64  and 100 regions and save the data to a csv file     Use plates with wells that will hold at least 185 uL  the extra 25 uL  from the sample  plus an extra 160 uL that is dispensed back into the  well following acquisition      Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology         Tocreate a New Advanced Batch   1  Open the Acq  Detail tab     2  On the Acquisition Detail toolbar  click New Advanced Batch   The Options Dialog Box opens with the General tab displayed   See Figure 5 35 
132. ed text  This distinguishes the change from the patient  information entered into the original batch  Patient list entries are  case sensitive  Figure 5 33 shows an edited patient list     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology        To edit a patient list     1  On the File menu  select Edit Patient List  The Open Batch  dialog box opens     2  Select the desired batch containing the patient list that you want  to edit and click Select  The Edit Patient List dialog box opens  similar to Figure 5 33     3  Edit the desired patient and associated dilution factor  information  Click Finish to accept your edits and close the  dialog box     A Edit Patient List   Batch 4 5 02 12 09  ID   6     gi  Location  Sample ID Dil  Factor  C1 1 v  D1 Finish  E1 1  F1    X  Cancel                        LJ    Load Pa List       Figure 5 33  Edit Patient List Dialog Box    Assign Sample Indicate the sample dilution factor so the sample analysis in  Dilution Factors quantitative tests is accurate  The system multiplies the result by the  dilution factor for reporting     Do not use dilution factors for qualitative testing     You define the dilution factors on a sample by sample  or patient by   patient basis  The list displays each sample   s accession number and  dilution factor in relation to its well position         To assign sample dilution factors     1  On the File menu  click New Batch  The Open Template dialog  box opens     2  Select the desired template and click 
133. een acquired   you must  rename the lot         To create a new lot     1  On the Home tab  click New Lot  The Open Template dialog  box opens  See Figure 5 41     Open Template      Version       ID  Template Name Description                  3 Template 1 28 02 9 32 bwh vbby h  4 Template 1 28 02 10 22 21h  5 Template 1 29 02 12 2 2 90  B Template 1 29 02 12 25 123  7 Template 2 5 02 15 42 2 2 100  8 Template 2 5 02 10 04 2 2 101  9 Template 2 6 02 10 55 2 2 101  10 Template 2 6 02 10 58 2 2 101  11 Template 2 6 02 11 00 2 2 101  12 Template 2 5 02 11 01 2 2 101  ate 2 6 02 11 02 2 2 101       13 Temp       Select Cancel      Figure 5 41  Open Template Dialog Box       2  Highlight the template that will use the new lot information and    6699    click Select  Then  continue with substep    a    or  b      a   If this is a new template with no associated lot information  a  New Standard Lot or New Control Lot dialog box opens as  appropriate  Enter the standard and control numbers to con     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Note  Depending on the  types of products associ   ated with the template that  you select  the screen may  vary from the example in  Figure 5 43  That is  if you  are creating only standard  lots  then only the upper    xMAP Technology    tinue  Once you enter the numbers  the Update Lot Informa   tion dialog box opens  See Figure 5 42 and Figure 5 43     b   If the template has associated lot information  the Update  Lot Information dialog box 
134. en click Select  The most recent Replay Batch is the  last or has the highest ID number  See Figure 5 29     Open Batch E    ID Batch Name Description Multi Batch ID  Name       2 B3554 Quant Testing Mean  SD  Trimmed Mean  4 3654 Rep Quant Batch Mean  SD  Trimmed Mean  5 Batch 5 1 12 16 10 FILEMODE       None     6 Batch 6 102 16 11 FILEMODE   None     7 Batch 6 3402 1349 FILEMODE   None     B Batch 5 342 13 51 FILEMODE   None     9 Batch 5 3 12 113 52 FILEMODE       None     10 Batch 5 3402 13 53 FILEMODE       None     11 Batch 5 342 13 54 FILEMODE   None     12 Batch 5 3402 14 13 FILEMODE       None     13 Batch 5 3 02 14 17 FILEMODE       None     14 Batch 6 302 14 17_FILEMODE       None     16 Ratch RAM 14 10  Ell EMODE     chon zj       Cancel            Figure 5 29  Analyze Open Batch    The Analysis window opens  showing the Batch info in the  Standards tab  To close the Analysis window click Close  See     Analyzing Batches and Multi Batches    on page 76      Delete a Batch You can only delete unprocessed batches  Batches are deleted from  the Open Batch list and moved to the Open Incomplete Batch list         To delete an unprocessed batch     1     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    On the File menu  click Delete Batch  A dialog box opens listing  the unprocessed batches in the database     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Create a Multi   Batch    xMAP Technology    2  Select the unprocessed batch that you want to delete     3  Click Select to delete the batc
135. end at the left  side of the tab  No  Cmd  Name  and Symbol columns   shows available commands  and their colored coded sym   bols  Symbol appears in the    Table 5 9  Symbol          Color Codes  Symbol Color  A Blue   Cl Red  C2 Green  NI Teal  N2 Purple  W Olive   D Black   S Fuchsia                PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    6  Click the Bead Set tab  Select the checkboxes next to each  desired bead set for this batch  Click Select All to select all the  listed bead sets  or Deselect All to deselect all selected bead sets               General   Plate Layout    Selected  Events   Caption  Select All i 100 001  m 100 002  Deselect AIl   oO 100 003  L1 100 D04  Default Events  cr D TE  oO 100 006  100 m 100 007  o 100 008  Apply to All O 100 D09  o 100 010  oO 100 011  O 00 D12 zl                100 regions Y             OK   Cancel    Figure 5 36  Options Dialog Box   Bead Set Tab    7  Editthe Events and Caption information for each bead set  Edit  the Default Events box to change the default value  Click Apply  to All to apply the default value to all bead sets  Table 5 8 lists  selection shortcuts     Table 5 8  Bead Set Tab   Selection Shortcuts    Selected Column Select by clicking in the box        Events Column Select desired field and right click   The value displayed in the    Default  Events  box updates the selected field    when you click    Apply Default         If names are defined under this  column  you can right click 
136. eplace the sample probe and adjust the vertical height  You  should adjust the vertical height anytime the probe is removed    4  Alcohol Flush the system with 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol    Clean Exterior Surfaces     To clean exterior surfaces  follow these steps     1  Disconnect the system from ac power by turning off the power  switches and unplugging the Luminex 100 analyzer  the Luminex  XYP instrument  and the Luminex SD system     2  Wipe all exterior surfaces with mild detergent  then a 10  to  20  bleach solution  and finally with plain distilled water     6 4 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Calibration and System  Controls    Every Six Months    Luminex 100 Analyzer Air  Intake Filter    Note  Hold on to the tubing   Do not allow the tubing to fall  inside the the analyzer     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Maintenance and Cleaning    Open both doors of the analyzer and clean all accessible surfaces  with detergent followed by a 10  to 20  bleach solution and  then plain distilled water     Dry the sheet metal surfaces to prevent corrosion     Plug in and power on the Luminex 100 analyzer  the Luminex  XYP instrument  and the Luminex SD system     Calibrate the system as outlined in    Calibration Procedures  on  page 5 46     Run calibration and system controls at least once a month during  routine use and     following installation  if the system is moved  if a part is replaced    if the delta calibration temperature shown on the system monitor 
137. er    Home   Run Batch   Maintenance   Diagnostics L Luminex100 Integrated System 2 3    Batch Hame  Batch 4 26 2005 10 42  Batch Description     Autosize   Statistic   Median  gt       jm Mb xoa          Sample  TestA 39  Te  ire Mstand     B 56  Test C  36        E3  Platel  F3  Platel         Show Bead     alb        PEE fe       8                i   7500 15000                       PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C          1  Luminex IS 2 3 Toolbar 5  Status Bar  2  Batch Name and Description 6  Histogram  3  Batch Data Area 7  Dot Plot    4  Acquisition Detail Toolbar  Figure 5 11  Acquisition Detail Tab    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    The Batch Name and Description section displays the name of the  batch as well as its description     The Batch Data area displays sample results  The left column shows  plate location and Sample ID description  The remaining columns  display selected bead sets for the assay  Each row represents the data  for each bead set from one well     The Acquisition Detail Toolbar shown in Figure 5 12 provides  functions to acquire raw data without using templates  The toolbar  has additional buttons if you have Developer s Workbench installed   For more information about the commands on the Acquisition Detail  Toolbar  see the Command section  beginning on page 5 31     diae b xo lll    1 2 3 4 35 6 7       1  Replay Batch 6  Cancel All   2  New Advanced Batch 7  Eject Retract  3  View Batch Data 8  Pause   4  Start Plate 9
138. er  there is no  guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation   If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  television reception  which can be determined by turning the  equipment off and on  the user is encouraged to try to correct the  interference by one or more of the following measures       Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna      Increase the separation between the equipment and the  receiver    Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  from that to which the receiver is connected     Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for  help     This system contains fluidics  In the event of a fluid leak  turn off all  power to the system and disconnect all power cords  Remember that  the on off switch is not a disconnect means  the power cord must be  removed from the outlet  Contact Luminex Corporation for further  information     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 Analyzer  Laser    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Safety    You must monitor waste levels manually  Do not allow the waste  container to overflow  Empty the waste container each time the  sheath fluid container is filled  Do not place the waste container on  top of the instrument     Warning  If biological samples have been tested with the system   use your standard laboratory safety practices when handling    system waste        The Luminex 100 IS system classifies per FDA 21 CFR 1040 10 and  1040 11 as
139. era opc eb atia ders 3 10   sheath Filter   dece eer eR ep ERR s 3 11   Air  Waste  and Sheath Fluid Connectors             3 11  Luminex Sheath Delivery System                   3 12   Waste Fluid Container             0    0 20 ee ee eee 3 12   Optical    nation eae So Foe cola N dard ack 3 12  xMAP Technology Reagents                0 000008  3 12  Basic Concepts 4 1  Background Information             lllslleeeeeeeeeeeA 4 1  a e uice re e ob eR ERST ef CERT a ERST 4    Excitation ea eaa loli e RA ERR IRE sab bene ERE RE E 4 1  xMAP Microspheres           0 000 cece ee 4 2  Software Overview    0 0    cece een eee 4 2  Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software 5 1  Main  WindOW  i5 eq ee C RO Res adios wa ae alas 5 1   Menu Bat   eo err Gee IRR RCM AGRO RSV e 5 3   Toolbar  55 3 e repe ee eye Re gr este Wo este e p R6 5 4   Tabs 4E bEbeGenBUdesephb bee xS d bre d bre td 5 4   Home tab    seus REV RV ER  DET  ES 5 4  Run Batch Tab      0 0    0    eee 5 5  Maintenance Tab              0 0  c eee eee eee eee 5 8  Diagnostics tab 1 0    eee ies 5 9  Acquisition Detail Tab                 0000000008  5 12    ii PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Contents    Status Bar oclo e lA e ERAI REVELA YS penes 5 17  Secondary Windows           0      eee eee cece eee 5 20  Batch Setup Window           0 0    cee eee eee eee 5 20  Analysis Window          0 0 0  e eee eee eee eens 5 22  Errors  Tab  ius et bes Dee beat OU RP Tea 5 23  Standards Tab    uu esee eee eme RR UR gs 5 24  Sam
140. ersion 2 3    Selecting Existing  CAL or CON Lots    Importing CAL or  CON Lots    xMAP Technology    4  Ensure that the analyzer is set to draw CONI and CON2 beads  from the wells you loaded in step 2 of    Run System xMAP  Calibrators  on page 5 47     5  Inthe Maintenance tab  click CONI then click OK  Wait until  CONI completes  The Device Status section in the status bar  changes from    Running    to    Standby        6  Click CON2  then click OK  Wait until CON2 completes  The  Device Status section in the status bar changes from  Running   to    Standby     The System Monitor on the Diagnostics tab  displays date and time in green if both CONI and CON2 are  successful     7  Ensure the analyzer is set to the draw distilled water from the  well you loaded it in step 2 of    Run System xMAP Calibrators     on page 5 47     8  Click Wash to wash the system after running the system  calibrators  Wash a total of four times  You will need to change  the well location  Click on the dropdown menu located to the  right of the Wash button     9  Click OK and wait until the wash completes  The device status  section in the status bar changes from  Running  to  Standby      If an error occurs during system calibration or verification  an X  appears in front of the Diagnostics tab title  and the title text turns  red         To select an existing lot     1  On the Maintenance tab  click New CAL Targ or New CON  Targ     2  Selecta lot using the arrows located to the right of the I
141. escence intensity values    Detect 1000 fluorochromes phycoerythrin  PE  per xMAP  microsphere    Reporter channel dynamic range  3 5 decades of detection    The specifications below reflect minimum capacity values     10 GB hard drive   100 MB read write CD ROM   Analyze multiple 96 well plates per batch   Analyze multiple assay templates per plate   Distinguish a minimum of 1 to a maximum of 100 unique xMAP  microsphere sets in a single sample   Detect and distinguish surface reporter fluorescence emissions at  575 nm on the surface of 1 100 unique xMAP microspheres sets  in a single sample   Sample core  15 20 um core at 1 uL sec  sample inject rate  Maintain samples at a constant temperature from 35  C to 55  C   95  F to 131  F    Automatic sampling from a 96 well plate   Start sampling from any well position   Sheath container and waste container hold enough volume to run  up to two 96 well plates between refills   Microtiter plates with 96 wells must be compatible with the  Luminex XYP instrument plate holder  The following microtiter  plate types are compatible with the Luminex XYP instrument  plate holder  flatbottom  conical  round  filter bottom  half plates   overall height no more than 0 75     19 mm    any color    Microtiter plates with 96 wells must be compatible with  Luminex XYP instrument heater block temperature from 35  C to    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100  Analyzer General    Optics    Fluidics    Electronics    PN 89 00002
142. esults  Notice that  the well G3 location test result is     lt 10    and the associated  Comments column for the third sample indicates a sample out of  range error    Sample High Low    because this sample has an MFI less  than the lowest standard in the standard curve for this non   competitive batch     The first sample is within the standard curve range and thus displays  an unflagged test result     The system does not flag results as normal or abnormal according to  a defined range  Error flags only note samples that fall below or    above the standard curve     The Comments column cells are editable and the information is  displayed in reports     5 28 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    ES Analysis  lal   x     Protein Batch    Errors  F9    Standards  F11   S     System Comments    Open Batch   Export Data   Close      IL 4          R   2 0 9995  Sample High Low       Background          R 2 0 9999  Sample High Low       Background                      R 2 0 9994  Sample High Low       Next Test  F2    Invalidate Standard  FA    Invalidate Control  F6    Change Formula  F8    ee Mn Ue orien menial Recac  F ato  Previous Test  F3    Validate Standard  F5    Validate Control  FT    Change Lot  Alt  F8    C Alphabetically  by Sample ID        Background  Unknown 1   Unknown 1   Unknown 2 Sys Sample High Low  Unknown 2 Sys Sample High Low  Unknown 3    Sys Sample High Low  Unknown 3    Sys Sample High Low  Unknown 4      
143. ete batch     1  On the File Menu  click Open Incomplete Batch  The Open  Run dialog box opens  Select the batch you wish to recover from  the list     2  Click Start to continue where the batch left off  Note that a  comment is added to the batch to indicate that the batch is being  rerun     The barcode reader lets you quickly enter sample identification  numbers or accession numbers  Use the Code 128 barcode label type  when scanning barcode labels into the system as patient identities     Warning  Laser light  Do not stare into the beam  Class II laser  product         To scan samples into the system using the barcode reader     1  Aim the barcode reader s beam to read the middle of the barcode  series  horizontally  The beam must encompass the entire set of  bars  See the shaded area in Figure 5 32     Figure 5 32  Barcode Reader Beam Aimed Across Code                            Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Squeeze the barcode reader s trigger  The beam activates and  reads the barcode  The barcode information appears in the  appropriate row     Visually verify that the barcode data scanned correctly  It is  critical that you scan  or enter  the correct identification number     Add a Patient List You can apply a Patient List to any batch or multi batch only during  batch setup in the Luminex Batch Setup dialog box     You can create a Patient List text file using Windows Notepad or a  text editor  The text file must meet the following req
144. etween you  either an individual  or a single entity  also referred herein as  you   the end user and Luminex Corporation     Luminex     regarding  the use of the Luminex software product identified above  which includes computer software and online or  electronic documentation and may include associated media and printed materials  if any   SOFTWARE  PRODUCT    or  SOFTWARE     The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties  as well as  other intellectual property laws and treaties  The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed  not sold     1  GRANT OF LICENSE  Subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA  Luminex hereby grants to you a  nonexclusive  nontransferable  nonassignable license  without right to sublicense  under Luminex s  copyrights and trade secrets to use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on a hardware platform purchased from  Luminex pursuant to Luminex s terms and conditions of sale  You may make one  1  copy of the  SOFTWARE PRODUCT for backup or archival purposes only  Although no rights or licenses under any  of Luminex s patents are granted by or shall be implied from the license of the SOFTWARE or the sale of  Luminex instrumentation to you  the purchaser  you may obtain a license under Luminex s patents  if any   to use this unit of Luminex instrumentation with fluorescently labeled microsphere beads authorized by  Luminex by purchasing such beads from Luminex or an authorized Luminex reseller     2  RESTRICTIONS   e You must mai
145. ev  C    xMAP Technology    Open a Multi   Batch    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Create a New Batch  The procedure is shown on page 5 53   Click Save and Load instead of Save Only when you are  finished setting up the New Batch     To reassign the positions of the batches within the multi batch   use the mouse to drag the highlighted well to the location on the  microtiter plate where you want to begin acquiring data  Make  sure that each additional batch is in its desired location     Enter the Multi Batch name and Created By  then click Finish   The Run Batch tab opens  representing the batches you selected  or created on the microtiter plate     Click Eject and load the first plate of the multi batch     Click Start Plate to being acquiring data from the multiple  batches in the sequence that you set up     To create a multi batch with existing batches   Click New Multi Batch     In the Luminex Multi Batch dialog box  click Add Batch to  add an existing batch to the multi batch  See Figure 5 30     Select the first batch to add and click Select  The batch appears  beginning in well A1 of the microtiter plate on the Luminex  Multi Batch Setup dialog box  Red lines separate this batch  from subsequent batches     Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional batches     Enter the Multi Batch name and Created By  then click Finish   The Run Batch tab opens  representing the batches you selected  or created on the microtiter plate     Click Eject 
146. ex or pipette your samples  up and down to ensure that the  beads are present in the  solution     Replace photobleached  microspheres with a fresh lot of  microspheres        There is an insufficient number  of beads in the sample     Ensure that there are 2000 5000  beads per set per well        Bead Detail  Irregularities    Use these tools to assist in diagnosing system and kit related    problems       system calibrators    system controls     assay standards     assay controls    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Troubleshooting      error messages  Review reports routinely to detect trends     Use system xMAP control microspheres to check the success of the  system calibration and for troubleshooting purposes  If there is a  problem with your kit results  xMAP controls can help determine if  the problem is analyzer related  If Calibration and Controls are  successful  contact the kit manufacturer     A normal bead detail display is shown below  It depicts a tight bead  population within a white region     Bead Details          Figure 7 1 Normal Bead Detail    The histogram for the bead detail above looks like this           Figure 7 2 Normal Histogram    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 7 11    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology       Symptom    Possible problem    Solution       Calibration microspheres  classify too high      amp     You may be using  photobleached calibration  microspheres     Replace the microspheres with a  fresh batch  
147. fluid pressure is too  high     Ensure that the sheath fluid  container is at the same level as  the analyzer  On systems with a  Luminex Sheath Delivery  system  ensure that the sheath  fluid pressure reading is equal to  the original ready by adjusting  the regulator as outlined in   Install the SD System  on  page B 10  Calibrate and verify  the system        Runtime Sheath Pressure Out  of Limits  Too Low     There is a pressurization  problem with the sheath fluid     See Pressurization on page 7 3        Low Laser Power Detected    The system isn t sufficiently  warmed up     Possible Laser Failure    Warm up the system  This takes  approximately 30 minutes   Calibrate and verify the system     Open the calibration trend  report for LIOOCAL2 and  record the last three reporter  voltages  Contact Luminex  Technical Support with this  information        PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Command Encountered Time  Out Error    The current command failed     Troubleshooting    Check the system to verify that  itis warmed up and that there  are no pressurization problems   Repeat the command  If the  command continues to time out   contact Technical Support        Instrument Not Calibrated    The instrument is out of  calibration     Calibrate the instrument        Sample Error    Sample error messages occur when there is a problem with sample       Mess ag es acquisition  These errors can display on the Diagnostics tab in the  Message Log  in Reports  or on the
148. for acquisition     2  The Open Batch command on the Analysis window allows you  to view data from a different batch     Opens the online help file     Opens the Open Run dialog box  in which you select a batch to  recover     Opens the Open Multi Batch dialog box  in which you select a multi   batch to use for acquisition     Pauses the command that the system is currently processing     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Previous Test    Prime    Print Batch Worklist    Print Report    Recalc    Replay Batch    Report Raw Fluorescence    Resume    Sample Probe Down    Sanitize    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    This command is found in the Analysis window  Use this command  to view the previously run test in the batch     Removes air from the system s fluidic pathways by drawing  Luminex xMAP Sheath Fluid from the sheath fluid container  You do  not need to supply solution in a plate  Priming takes approximately  one minute  This command should also be used as part of the daily  startup routine     Prints the status of each of the commands in the command list  as  well as the microtiter plate graphic     Prints the data interpretation report including the standards  controls   graph of standards  and Samples data     Recalculates an affected test after a change is made to lot  information  There are two options  Manual recalculate and auto  If  the auto checkbox is selected  the Recalc button  manually  recalculate  is grayed o
149. garding the patient file format     Verify the dilution factor settings  and adjust as necessary  See  page 5 64 for more information     Select Save and Load  default  or Save Only     Click Finish  If you selected Save and Load  the Run Batch tab  opens displaying the batch  including the samples you added  If  you selected Save Only  the system becomes idle as it waits for  you to initiate a command     If you selected Save and Load  load the plate using the Eject   Retract button  then click Start Plate     Use this procedure to open an existing batch  The batch name and    description appear on the Run Batch tab when you load the batch     You can open    Saved Only  batches with this procedure          1     2     To open a saved batch for an acquisition     Click Open Batch  The Open Batch dialog box opens     Double click on the desired batch  The system loads the batch as  you created it in the Run Batch tab     Click Start Plate to initiate batch acquisition     To export Batch Data     Right click in the Batch Data area of the Acquisition Detail tab   In the right click menu  click Copy to copy the currently  displayed data to the clipboard  Click Export to manually export  the currently loaded batch to the appropriate Output csv file     The Clear Batch command clears the entire batch from the Run    Batch tab or the Message Log on the Diagnostic tab  Once you    choose to clear the batch and verify that you want to continue with    the command  you can recover th
150. gins warming up when you  turn power on  however  you will need to use the Warmup command  if the system is idle for four hours or longer     Washes fluidics line  Sends fluid  distilled water  through the fluidic  lines in the system  Pulls the fluid from a well or the reservoir and  runs it completely through the system to the waste receptacle     Zooms or enlarges a specific area on the histogram or dot plot  display  Click and drag right to left to adjust the graph s range     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Procedures    Using the Online Help    xMAP Technology    This section explains how to perform functions in the software     Help files describe Luminex System features and capabilities  You  may find these topics by searching the contents of books and topics  or by searching an alphabetic listing of the topics and books     Topics provide information and details regarding software features   system capabilities  and any number of related material     Books usually contain a group of topics  These topics are grouped  together because they discuss similar or related topics     Hyperlinks provide instant access to another topic or subtopic with  related information to the linked subject or term         To open the system s online help     1  On the Help menu  click Contents     2  Inthe Help dialog box  scroll through the contents and select the  desired topic  Also  consider the index to locate information     3  Double click the help topic that you want to v
151. h     If you need to recover a deleted batch  select Open Incomplete  Batch from the File menu     A multi batch is a set of batches that you want to process  consecutively  You can add batches to the multi batch from existing  batches in your database  or you can create new batches to add to the  multi batch  You can include as many batches as you need  The  software does not limit you to a certain number of batches per multi   batch  Different batches within the multibatch are separated by thick  red lines above the first well and below the last well of each batch   Multi batches may span more than one plate  A blue line separates  the graphical representation of the plates  A scroll bar appears along  the bottom of the microtiter plate image so you can view additional  plates         To create a multi batch with new batches     1  Click New Multi Batch  The Luminex Multi Batch Setup dialog  box opens  shown in Figure 5 30         u   Luminex Multi Batch Setup  Please enter the required information and add batches to the  Multi Batch list     You may double click a batch for detailed  information  Note    indicates a required field     EIA     X  Add Batch New Batch Finish Cancel    m Multi Batch Name                          By              z le  7    mlelolse           QOOOOO0O0O0O0000     No ID Batch Name  Batch Description  No Cmds       Figure 5 30  Luminex Multi Batch Setup Dialog Box    2  Inthe Luminex Multi Batch dialog box  click New Batch     PN 89 00002 00 071 R
152. he Instrument   3  Open Batch 10  Disconnect from the Instrument  4  Create New Multi Batch 11  Eject Retract   5  Open Multi Batch 12  Open Help File   6  Start Analysis 13  Single Step   7  Export Batch Data    Figure 5 2  Luminex IS 2 3 Toolbar  Tabs    This section describes the tabs in the Main window    Home tab This is the default tab  It is organized by the order of system use  It  contains a Favorites list and five button groups representing data  acquisition and maintenance categories         Luminex100 IS Software  Eile Tools Help  m Re   z    IRA Q   Single Step    Home   Run Batch   Maintenance   Diagnostics   Acq Detail      Luminex          Luminex100 Integrated System 2 3    Favorites Daily Startup    Add Add  Tempiatil  a pex il E   r i Eo H E  E BackFlust ly A oM  le  Step 4 1 2 Template   ui Pfeil Aicohol Fi ashi  Instrument Calibration    d od ed  ad    Batch Setup 2     mm   K                Reports and Analysis    LIE    Analys  Print        Daily Shutdown    KT eel                      1  Favorites List 2  Button Groups    Figure 5 3  Home Tab    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Run Batch Tab    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Favorites  You can use the Favorites list to create a customized list  of often used commands and templates  Items appear in alphabetical    order for easy locating  For more information on setting up the  Favorites list  see page 5 42     Button Groups  Button groups are grouped ac
153. he base of the cuvette  The sample then passes through  with sheath fluid at a reduced rate resulting in a narrow sample core  to ensure that each microsphere is illuminated individually  The  sample injection rate is such that the xMAP microspheres are  introduced to the optics path as a series of single events  The  Luminex SD system lets you run samples continuously without  refilling sheath bottles  It automatically draws sheath from a non  pressurized bulk sheath container to constantly maintain a reservoir    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Hardware    xMAP Technology    of pressurized sheath fluid  A single 20 liter sheath container  provides enough fluid for 48 hours or more of normal operation     The optics assembly consists of two lasers  One laser excites the dye  mixture inside the xMAP microspheres and the second laser excites  the fluorosphere bound to the surface of the xMAP microspheres   Avalanche photo diode detectors measure the excitation emission  intensities of the color coding classification dye mixtures inside the  xMAP microspheres and a photomultiplier tube detects the excitation  emission intensity of the reporter molecule bound to the surface of  the xMAP microspheres  High speed digital signal processors and  advanced computer algorithms provide analysis of the xMAP  microspheres as they are processed through the Luminex 100  analyzer  Results of the analyses are processed and provided in a  report format     The Luminex 100 IS system i
154. he cable that connects the  analyzer to the PC is 5 feet long  the  cable that connects the SD to the  analyzer is 2 5 feet long     10     xMAP Technology    Luminex19         Figure B 3 Install Alignment Guide    Ensure that the power switches on the analyzer and XYP  instrument are in the off position     Attach the power cord to the power input module of the Luminex  XYP instrument and attach the serial cable to the Luminex X YP  instrument  Do not plug the Luminex XYP instrument into the  power outlet     Attach the power cord to the input module of the Luminex 100  analyzer  then attach the USB cable  PN 85 10011 00 046  to P1  on the analyzer  Do not plug the power cord into the power  outlet  See Figure B 4     Connect the Luminex 100 analyzer USB cable and the Luminex  XYP instrument serial cable to the PC  See items 12 and 14 in  Figure B 4     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 IS System Setup       4  1  USB Communication Cable  P1  9  Y Cable Port  2  Luminex XYP Instrument 10  Mouse Cable port  3  Luminex XYP Instrument to PC Serial Cable     11 PC Power Cable  4  Power Cords 12  Luminex 100 port  USB   5  Luminex XYP Instrument Power Switch 13  Monitor cable port  6  Luminex 100 Analyzer Power Switch 14  Luminex XYP port  7  Luminex 100 analyzer 15  Printer cable port    8  SD Cable  P2   Figure B 4  Luminex 100 IS Connections  Luminex 100 analyzer  Luminex XYP Instrument  and PC     11  Connect the Y cable to the barcode reader and key
155. he database is backed up and the  Backup Database To    dialog box closes  Close the IS Software     You remove the Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 or 2 2 software through  the Windows Control Panel     1     On the PC desktop select  Start gt Settings gt Control Panel   The Control Panel dialog box opens on the desktop     Double click the Add Remove Programs icon  The  Add Remove Programs dialog box opens     Under the Currently installed programs list  select the Luminex  100 IS entry  The entry expands to include the Change Remove  button  Click Change Remove     The InstallShield Wizard dialog box opens similar to Figure B   17  Select Remove and click Next     The Confirmation File Deletion dialog box opens  Click OK     If a Shared File Detected dialog box opens  select the Don   t  display this message again checkbox  then click Yes     If a Self registration error dialog box opens  Click OK     When the InstallShield Wizard   Maintenance Complete dialog  box opens  click Finish     In the Add Remove Programs dialog box  click Close  Click the  X on the Control Panel to close it     If the Luminex 100 IS icon is still present on the desktop  select  the icon and drag it to the Recycle Bin     To install the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software  continue with Install  Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software  page B 15      PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 IS 2 3  Firmware  Installation    Firmware Upgrade Cable  Configurations    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 1
156. he lot concentration values     Click Save  A dialog box opens alerting you that this lot has  been used to set up a batch and that you must create a new lot to  continue     Respond to the Create New Standard Lot or Create New Control  Lot with Yes  Rename it in the New Lot Number dialog box     Import Lot to an Use this procedure to import a lot to an existing template from  Existing Template another computer  from a diskette  or from a CD ROM         To import a lot to an existing template     1     On the Home tab  click New Lot  The Open Template dialog  box opens     Select the template to receive the imported lot and click Select   The Update Lot Information dialog box opens  See Figure 5   45     Click Import Lot  The Open dialog box opens     Navigate to the desired drive   s folder and select the lot that you  want to import and click Open  The lot imports into your  template     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Export a Lot from  an Existing  Template    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software              Update Lot Information    Import   Export    amp  2 Cal x  i uer Revert  Save   Cancel    Change the current lot by saving selected lot   r Test Standards  2000 Current Lot  B3654QtStd    Current Lot  REEE  NewLot   Delete Lot   Exp  Date   06 05 2003     7                       r Test Controls  2000 Current Lot  B3654QtCon  Current Lot   B36540Con    NewLot   DeleteLot   Exp  Datefo3 07 2003       LowLimit Expected Values   
157. hen the download is finished the Status text box displays  Download Complete  Click OK     6  Turn off the power for 5 seconds  then turn the power to the    Luminex 100 back on     7  Next verify the upgrade  See note     1  Start up the Luminex 100 IS software     2  On the Help menu  click About the Device  The About the    Luminex 100  amp  Luminex XYP Devices dialog box opens     3  Verify that the Controller Version entry for the Luminex 100    Device Information section on the dialog box displays the  upgrade version     If you are upgrading from Luminex 100 Version 1 7 replace the  serial interface cable with USB cable supplied in the upgrade     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Luminex XYP Instrument  Firmware Update    Update Firmware    Note  If you are directed by  Technical Support or by upgrade  kit instructions to upgrade to a  specific firmware version  then  click the Browse button and  select the desired firmware  version from the Open dialog box     Note  If you are upgrading the  Luminex 100 firmware  consider  doing it at this time  then verify  the Luminex 100 analyzer and the  Luminex XYP instrument at the  same time     Verify Successful  Firmware Upgrade    xMAP Technology    If you are upgrading from Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 or 2 2  continue to use the USB cable     Follow the steps in this section to update and verify the Luminex  XYP instrument firmware     To update the Luminex XYP instrument firmware     1     2     Close any open appl
158. hen you replay a batch it labels  unknown samples as Pal  Pa2  Pa3  and so on  If you replay a batch  containing replicates  replicate averaging will not be calculated in  data analysis     A number of variables can affect the final test results  You may also  change the standards or controls processed with the batch or multi   batch  These variables may effect your test results      minimum number of events for acquisition     formula used to analyze the MFI values   e standards or controls validation or invalidation      type of analysis  qualitative  quantitative  acquisition only  or  maintenance         To reprocess samples using Replay Batch     1  On the Acq  Detail tab  click Replay Batch  The Browse for  Folder dialog box opens displaying the My Batches folder     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    2     Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Select the desired batch under the My Batches folder and click  OK     The Open Template dialog box opens  Click on the desired  template and click Select     The Run Batch tab becomes the active tab  You can monitor the  commands as they process  Click on the Acq  Detail tab and  monitor the data  histogram  and dot plot     After replaying a batch  you can analyze the data         To analyze Replay Batch data     1   Note  The Open Batch 2   dialog box does not list or  show the templates asso   ciated to the batches     Click Start Analysis     In the Open Batch dialog box  select the batch you want to  analyze  th
159. hway 4 1   patient summary reports 4 3  5 86  PC specifications 3 6  performance specifications 3 3    Index 3    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    photodiode 4 1  photomultiplier 4 1  plate 4 1  plate holder  ejecting  tray B 10  polystyrene 4 2  power down 6 4  Practical Flow Cytometry  3rd edition  by  Howard M  Shapiro  M D   New York  Wiley Liss Inc   1995  4 1  Preliminary Off plate commands  clear 5 69  preventing corrosion 6 4  prime  remove air in waste line 6 2  printer 3 7  printing 4 3  probe 4 1  B 8  probe removal B 7  processed batches analyze 5 83  product numbers 8 1  protect 4 2  protection provided 2 2  protective housing 2 6    Q    Quality Control Report 5 86  R    radiation exposure 2 6  rate 4 1  raw fluorescence 5 39  reaction 4 1  reagent specifications 3 3  reagents 3 3  8 3  specifications 3 3  refill sheath warning 6 2  release system pressure 6 2  remove  controls 5 84  probe B 7  shield B 8  standards 5 83  replace fuses 6 11  replace syringe plunger 6 8  report raw fluorescnce 5 39  reporter 4 1  reporter channel 3 5    Index 4    xMAP Technology    reporter laser 4 1  specifications 3 5  reports 4 3  reprocess batches 5 56  reservoir B 9  responsibility 2 9  restoring the database  reload database previously saved 5 91  results  reports 4 2  return shipment 2 9  running samples  after 6 1  before 6 1  once a day 6 1  sheath container cap 6 1  verify 6 1    S    safety advisories 2 2  safety information B 1  safety precautions 2 1  2 2  
160. iate biosafety procedures and use  personal protective equipment  such as gloves  gowns  laboratory  coats  face shields  or mask and eye protection  and ventilation  devices     Observe all local  state  and federal biohazard handling  regulations when disposing of biohazardous waste material        PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 2 7    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Heat    Warning  The heater plate of the Luminex XYP instrument may  be hot and could cause personal injury if touched  Do not touch    the heater plate        A    Blue Indicator Light The blue light above the Luminex 100 analyzer sample arm indicates  the on off status of the Luminex 100 analyzer  and is harmless  The  blue light emitting diode  LED  does not emit light in the UV  spectrum     2 8 PN 89 00002 00 07 1 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Decontaminating  the Luminex 100  Analyzer for Return  Shipment       Note  It is the user s       responsibility to       decontaminate the       analyzer before       shipment                                                  PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       Safety    Luminex Technical Support will give you a Return Material  Authorization  RMA  number if they direct you to return the system   They will explain how to return the system according to Luminex  procedures     The accessible surfaces and the internal fluidics system must be  sanitized and decontaminated before returning the analyzer  This is  particularly important when biohazardous sa
161. ication between the PC and the analyzer    Used during troubleshooting to help remove debris from the bottom  of the cuvette  When draining  you do not need to supply solution   Draining takes approximately two minutes and should be followed  by an alcohol flush with 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol  Any fluid  that drains from the system drains to the Luminex XYP reservoir as  the default  However  you can set the system to drain to any unused  well on the microtiter plate  The drain function normally expels 125  uL of fluid     If the XYP plate is retracted  this command ejects the microtiter  plate  If the XYP plate is already ejected  this command retracts the  plate     Saves bead event data to the database     Opens the Open Batch dialog box  from which you choose a batch to  export to an output csv file     Opens a dialog box in which you choose the calibration file to export  to an output file     Opens a dialog box in which you choose a control  validation  file to  export to an output file     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Export Data    Help    Import Calibration    Import Control    Import Template    Insert    Invalidate Control    Invalidate Standard    Load Patient List    Log Linear    Maximize Minimize    Next Test    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Exports data to a  csv file in the batch folder  There is no dialog box  to confirm that the data was exported     Opens the help file  Use this command if you nee
162. ications     On the PC desktop click  Start gt  Programs gt  Luminex gt  LXR gt LX Firmware  The LX  Firmware Update Tool dialog box opens  See Figure B 19     Notice in the Movement Device text box  item 3 in Figure B 19   that the top line displays the current version of the Luminex X YP  analyzer firmware and that the second line displays its status    If the second line indicates that the firmware is up to date  then  click Close  No further action is required  If an update version is  available  then continue with step 4     Click Upgrade adjacent to the Movement Device text box  The  Confirm XYP Firmware Download dialog box opens  Click Yes  to continue with the upgrade  Click No to return to the previous  dialog box     The Download In Progress dialog box opens displaying the  progress  Read the information presented on the dialog box   When the download is finished the Status text box displays  Download Complete     Turn the power off for 5 seconds  then turn the power to the XYP  back on     Click OK  Next verify the upgrade     Start up the Luminex 100 IS software     On the Help menu  click About the Device  The About the  Luminex100  amp  Luminex XYP Devices dialog box opens     Verify that the Controller Version entry for the Luminex 100  Device Information section on the dialog box displays the  version listed in the upgrade document  Your upgrade kit  instructions list the correct version number     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex SD Sys
163. iew  A topical  dialog box opens with information on that topic         To display device information about the Luminex analyzer   Luminex XYP instrument  and the Luminex LXR SDK     On the Help menu  click About the Device  The resulting dialog  box shows information that may be helpful when contacting  Luminex Technical Support  Click OK to close the dialog box         To display information about the system software   On the Help menu  click About the Software  The resulting dia   log box shows information about the system software  This  includes software version  build number  and the system copy   right information  Click OK to close the dialog box         To display system information     1  Onthe Help menu  click About the Software  The resulting  dialog box opens that displays software information     2  Click System Info  The System Information dialog box opens   Click X in the top right corner to close the dialog box     3  Click OK to close the dialog box     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Setting Software Options    Define General  Tab Information    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Set up and customize the system software and enter your company  information in the Options dialog box  The Software Options dialog  box has three tabs  the General tab  the Company Information tab   and the Data Export tab         To configure software options        Onthe Tools menu  click Options     2  Click on the tab in which you
164. ings defined by the  kit manufacturer     The process using system controls to ensure the analyzer is  functioning properly with current calibration settings     See Luminex xMAP microsphere set     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS System Installation    Overview    Luminex 100 IS  System Setup    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    This appendix provides hardware  firmware  and software  installation procedures as required for new or system updates  On  new systems  the factory preinstalls the latest versions of the  firmware and software  you perform only the hardware installation   Upgrades become available for enhancements or to repair a corrupted  file  Upgrade instructions or Luminex Technical Support may direct  you to sections in this appendix to perform a software or firmware  procedure     If this is a new Luminex 100 IS 2 3 system installation  then only  perform the procedure in the following  Luminex 100 IS System  Setup  section  Otherwise  perform any of the following procedures  as required     Q Luminex 100 IS System Hardware Setup   lIf you are install   ing the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 system hardware continue with  Luminex 100 IS System Setup  page B 1     Q Luminex 100 IS Software Installation   If you need to upgrade  or reinstall your Luminex 100 IS 2 3 system software  refer to  Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software Installation  page B 14     Q Luminex Firmware Installation   If you need to perform a  firmware upgrade in your Luminex 100 analyzer  Luminex XYP  in
165. inless steel filter end of the sheath fluid line to  the bottom of a full 20 liter box of sheath fluid  Secure the  cap on the sheath fluid box  Place the sheath fluid container  so that the cap is on the top     e Attach the power cord to the input module on the back of the  Luminex SD system  Connect the P1 cable  PN 85 10011   00 068  to the back of the SD and to P2 on the back of the  analyzer  Plug the power cord into the power outlet  See  Figure B 12        Figure B 12 Back of SD System  P1 Port    Turn on the power to the Luminex SD system  the Luminex SD  system automatically primes itself  You hear the Luminex SD  system pump turn on  When the Luminex SD reservoir is about  2 3 full  it automatically stops priming     Open the center access door on the Luminex 100 analyzer  Use a  screwdriver to turn the regulator fully clockwise  This typically  takes three to six full turns  Regulator is under arrow as Figure  B 13 shows     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Install the Luminex XYP  Instrument Heater Block    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS System Setup    EH  EH  EH  F      ss   lt    ss  w     lt   i      oe          Figure B 13 Luminex 100 Analyzer Regulator Adjustment    6  From the Home or Maintenance tab  select Prime  During this  prime cycle  use a screwdriver to adjust the regulator on the front  of the Luminex SD system  See Figure B 13  Adjust it until the  sheath pressure displayed on the Diagnostic tab  System Monitor  sectio
166. ion within the distribution     Std Dev       NZX     x     N  N 1    1       Trimmed Count    Trimmed Mean     Optional  The number of data points in the trimmed distribution  Nj       Optional  The sum of the data points in the trimmed distribution divided by  the number of data points   Trimmed Mean   2x    Ni       Trimmed  CV     Optional  The measure of relative dispersion within the trimmed distribution   Trimmed  CV   100 x Trimmed Std Dev   Trimmed Mean       Trimmed Peak     Optional  The value that is equal to the largest number of data points within  the trimmed distribution        Trimmed Std  Dev     Optional  The measure of dispersion within the trimmed distribution   Trimmed Std Dev      N   x    Ex     Ny  N   1            Avg Result       Statistics Column    Definitions        Optional  The average of any replicate samples  final test results  based on a qualitative or quantitative analysis     The blocks of statistical data are displayed such that the first row of  data represents the column headers and the following rows represent  the samples that were acquired for the batch     Table D 3 Statistic Column Definitions       Column Name    Description             Location The location of the sample in terms of the command list sequence  1   2  3       the well placement  A1  B1  C1       or both  1 A1   2 B1    3 C1          Sample The name of the sample as defined in the batch setup  Limited to 30    characters           Test  Test2        TestN    The nu
167. irmware is up to date  then  click Close  No further action is required  If an update version is  available  then continue with step 8    8  Click Upgrade adjacent to the Movement Device text box  The  Confirm SD Firmware Download dialog box opens  Click Yes to  continue with the upgrade  Click No to return to the previous  dialog box     9  The Download In Progress dialog box opens displaying the  progress  Read the information presented on the dialog box   When the download is finished the Status text box displays  Download Complete  Click OK     10  Turn off the power for 5 seconds  then turn it back on     1  On the PC desktop click  Start gt  Programs gt Luminex gt  LXR gt LX Firmware  The LX  Firmware Update Tool dialog box opens  See Figure B 19     2  Anentry in the Movement Device text box should read   Firmware up to date     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Turn the power off to the SD  XYP  and LX100   Reconnect the serial cable to the X YP   Connect the SD interface cable to the SD and LX100     Turn on the power to the SD  The XYP  and the LX100     Netwo rk Installation This section is intended for your network IT representative regarding  Advisory computer name changes  Luminex does not support network    installations  However  if your installation requires that you change  the computer name  perform these steps     Note  The Windows XP security    settings  Virus Protection  and e   Automatic Updates  alerts have   been turned off
168. is NO warning of  a high waste volume  Empty  the waste container each time  you fill the sheath container     Weekly    Visual Inspection    Run Self Diagnostics    Clean Sample Probe    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Maintenance and Cleaning        To refill the sheath fluid container     1  Release system pressure by removing the lid from the sheath  fluid container     2  Replace the sheath fluid box with a new box or refill the sheath  fluid container         To empty the waste container     1  Disconnect the waste container from the Luminex 100 analyzer     2  Discard the waste from the waste container by appropriate  means     3  Reconnect the waste container to the Luminex 100 analyzer and  replace the cap     Any time the sheath container is disconnected from the Luminex  100 analyzer  you must remove air from the sample lines by  priming     If the sheath container ever runs dry  prime the system at least  twice until the air is removed from the system     Open all of the Luminex 100 analyzer doors and visually inspect for  leaks  corrosion  and other signs of improper function  Check all  visible tubing connections  Check the Luminex XYP instrument air  intake filter for buildup of dust  Check the SD system and its  connection for leaks  If you see a leak  turn off the power to the  Luminex SD system and contact Luminex Corporation     Run Self Diagnostics on a weekly basis to check system integrity  On  the Maintenance tab  click Self Diag  The system performs self 
169. is immediately  applied     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 5 81    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Enable Automatic  Analysis    xMAP Technology    Viewing Style   Font Size   Numeric Precision   Plotting Method   Data Shadows   Grid Lines   Grid in Front   Include Data Labels  Comparison Subsets as Normal  Mark Data Points    LL  rh  XE  ML S  a       Maximize     Customization Dialog     Export Dialog       Figure 5 52  Graph Menu Items       You can configure the system to automatically start analysis  data  reduction  immediately following batch acquisition  If you disable  the Auto start Analysis feature  you must select Analysis from the  Home tab or toolbar to analyze a batch  Note that the Auto start  Analysis feature is disabled when processing a multi batch     To ensure that calculated data is exported to the output csv file  you  should not select both Auto Start Analysis and the Auto Export  Batches checkbox on the Data Export tab of the Options dialog box   Also note that Analysis and data reduction are synonymous terms         To enable automatic analysis     1  Onthe Tools menu  click Options  then click on the General  tab  See Figure 5 53           Luminex100 IS Software   Options sli xj  General   Company Information   Data Export      Default Batch Directory   c  My Batches Fal       Current User    A  Analysis Display Digits  2  Iv Display Confirmation Screens  r Enable Raw Data Storage  F Report Raw Fluorescence   s Auto start Analysis       9 OK ij
170. it  as defined in the template  It may also  indicate some error condition in the analysis  such as the sample was beyond  the range of the curve fit  a divide by zero error occurred  etc  Some example  include       Invalid    the user invalidated this sample  or a single test within a sample       lt 10 pg mL    the result could not be calculated because it fell outside the  valid range of the curve fit      210000 pg mL    the result could not be calculated because it fell outside  the valid range of the curve fit      ERROR    some mathematical error occurred  such as an MFI value that  does not intersect the concentration curve    N A   a result is not applicable for this sample  i e  a background sample        Count    The number of data points in the distribution  N   The number of gated events  that fell within the test s specified region        Mean           Optional  The sum of the data points in the distribution divided by the number  of data points     Mean   2x  N    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C          xMAP Technology    Table D 2 Statistics Definitions                   Statistic Description   CV  Optional  The measure of relative dispersion within the distribution    CV   100 x Std Dev   Mean  Peak  Optional  The value that is equal to the largest number of data points within  the distribution  For example in data set  1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5   3 is the peak  because it occurs the most number of times in the distribution list   Std Dev  Optional  The measure of dispers
171. itative and Quantitative algorithms  The algorithm is determined  by the kit manufacturer during template creation     A Qualitative analysis determines results as either positive or  negative  reactive or non reactive  and so on  The system is flexible  in defining custom result ranges  such as negative  low positive  high  positive  and so on  Refer to the Luminex Developer Workbench  Guide Version 2 3 for additional information  All determinations are  based on a single standard     A Quantitative analysis determines the sample concentrations from  standard curves using regression methods  such as 4P or 5P logistic  curve fitting     There are two main assay types  non competitive  such as a  capture  sandwich   and competitive  In a non competitive assay  the slope of  a concentration versus Mean Fluorescent Intensity  MFI  standard  curve is a positive number  That is  low concentrations result in low  MFIs and high concentrations result in high MFIs  Conversely   competitive assays generate a standard curve with a negative slope   the endpoints of which are high MFI low concentration on the left   and low MFI high concentrations on the right     You may direct the system to acquire samples in replicate regardless  of batch type  For qualitative batches  replicate values are averaged  and the reported interpretation is determined from this replicate  average     Replicates in quantitative batches are based on a standard curve that  is generated by either the    Fit of al
172. ity   eos tae e Read su dede i ex gra 3 4  Luminex 100 Analyzer General                    0 000000  3 5  OPUS soon eneilkks peed AER beads ad Edu Eder iad uds 3 5  PIUIAICS M  3 5    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Blectr  ties is ci ies lA Re er esI LEE RISE 3 5  Luminex XYP Instrument General                 0 0 0005 3 6  Luminex SD System General              0 000002 eee eee 3 6  PC Specifications  iua aa eoe wc P el eae eed 3 6   Recommended Additional Equipment                    3 7   Uninterruptible Power Supply  UPS                   3 7   Surge Protector n d cia hanes ei AG 3 7   Printer occ os ead ne eae bad ee    ERR os 3 7  Barcode Labels   oes ee Ron wae wares ae 3 7   0   gt   Care ran cie itrr tiri thr oiri eNe eii 3 7   Bath Sonicator  crase sce eee rh hes 3 7   System Overview        lesse 3 7  EleCtFODIOS iz  ee ure me eoe mech o Re UR RR Ae 3 7  Power Input Module                0 0 0    00 eee 3 7  Communications Ports SB9 PIN                000  3 7  Luminex 100 Analyzer Ventilation Filter              3 7  Luminex XYP Instrument Ventilation Filter            3 8  FluidiCS  ser RR che eee Re pir eee oie es as 3 8  sample  Arm      ide oe duce de ee rye won  legis 3 8  Luminex XYP Instrument Sample Probe               3 8  Cheminert   Fitting       0 0    2    eee eee ee eee 3 8   ACCESS  DOOIS  s eta epeece eb  ae epe Bh Ea es 3 9   Air Intake Filter             lees 3 10  SYMNGSC cds tanita eerie p
173. k Warmup  then click OK  The command list on the Run  Batch tab indicates that the system lasers are running  The  Device Activity box on the Status Bar indicates that the system is  warming  The Laser Status section on the Status Bar is yellow as  it counts down from 1800 seconds  Upon completion  the Laser  Status bar turns green and displays Warmed Up     Prime your system as part of the daily startup routine and as  necessary to remove air from the system s fluidic pathways after   e refilling the sheath container     removing and replacing the sheath container   e observing air in the tubing     changing the sheath fluid filter      changing the syringe seal    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Backflush the  System    Run an Alcohol  Flush    Run a Wash Cycle    xMAP Technology    When priming  the system draws Luminex xMAP sheath fluid from  the sheath fluid container and sends it directly out to waste  and takes  approximately one minute  You do not supply solution in a plate         To prime the system   Click Prime  then click OK to confirm that you want to prime  the system  The status bar indicates that the prime command is  processing     Backflush the system     to remove obstructions from the cuvette  e if fluid does not flow through the waste tubing during prime  cycles or during sample acquisition    e if fluid drips from the sample probe during priming and forms  puddles of fluid on the plate    During a backflush  the sy
174. k the Add Remove Programs icon  The  Add Remove Programs dialog box opens    3  Inthe Currently installed programs list  select LMAT entry  The    entry expands to include the Change Remove button  Click  Change Remove     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Remove Luminex  100 Version 1 7  Software    Note  During the Luminex  100 Version 1 7 software  removal  error dialog boxes  may open  They are of no  consequence to the uninstall   Just click OK or Yes in  response and continue with  the uninstall     xMAP Technology    The InstallShield Wizard   Welcome dialog box opens  See  Figure B 17        InstallShield wizard  gt  XI  Welcome  Madify  repair  or remove the program   amp   e     Welcome to the LMAT Setup Maintenance program  This program lets you modify the current  installation  Click one of the options below     C Modify  l Select new program components to add or select currently installed  components to remove     Cc    D          Ep     Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup     gh       ge    Remove all installed components     Back Cancel       Figure B 17 InstallShield Wizard Dialog Box   Remove    Select Remove and click Next  The Confirmation File Deletion  dialog box opens  Click OK     If the Shared File Detected dialog box opens  select Don   t  display this message again  then click Yes     If the Registry Editor dialog box opens  click OK     When the InstallShield Wizard   Maintenance Complete dialog  box opens  click
175. ker to  the right of the power input module     6  Replace the module door     7  Plugin and power on the analyzer or instrument     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 6 11    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS Maintenance Log Month s   Year        Procedure  Use this form to record information over a four week period  Fill in the month s  and year above  Fill in the dates in the first line of the table  For each item listed at the left  enter  your initials under each date that you perform the item     Note  Follow your standard laboratory safety practices when cleaning or maintaining the system  Do not remove the instrument cover under any circumstances        Dates       Daily maintenance       Startup Initials   for each item listed at the left  fill in your initials under each date that you perform the item        Laser warmup       Check sheath fluid       Check waste level       Tighten sheath cap       Alcohol Flush  7096 isopropanol or 7096  ethanol        Wash twice  sheath fluid or distilled  water        Shut down Initials   for each item listed at the left  fill in your initials under each date that you perform the item        Sanitize  1096 to 2096 household  bleach solution        Wash twice  water        Loosen sheath cap       Tum system off  optional                                                                                                                 Weekly   Visual inspection Date  nitia
176. l standards  or    Mean of  replicates   The chosen curve fit is defined by the assay developer  when defining an assay template  The default is    Fit of all  standards   Unknown samples are calculated from the standard    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Note  Luminex does not rec   ommend performing Data  Analysis while the Luminex  System is performing data  acquisition on another batch     Customize Data  Analysis Settings    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    curve  Replicate samples are averaged to determine the reported  quantitative result denoted as    AVG        The system can analyze only batches that it acquires using qualitative  or quantitative templates  It does not analyze acquisitions using Data  Collection Only or Maintenance templates     For an overview of the Analysis window  see page 5 22     You can customize how the sample data results are displayed in the  analysis graph on the Standards tab  There are two options that allow  you to customize the display  Use the Customization dialog box and  the Graph Menu  right click menu   some items are available on  both  You can define the general features of the graph  axis settings  and increments  fonts  colors  and styles presented in the graph  representing the sample data results  You also can export the analysis  to a graphic  file  clipboard  and so on         To modify the general features of the Standards tab graph   1  Click Data Analysis     2  Double c
177. lick OK  Wait until CON2 completes     Verify that the system controls completed successfully from the  Diagnostics tab System Monitor  If controls are successful  the   date and time appear as green text  If controls fail  the date and  time are appear as red text     On the Maintenance tab  click the well where you placed the  sheath fluid  Click Wash  A confirmation dialog box opens     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    15  Click OK and wait until the Wash completes  The Device Status  section on the Status Bar changes to standby when the Wash  cycle is complete  The Run Batch tab indicates if the command  succeeded or failed upon completion     16  Run four WASH commands     7 20 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Product Numbers    Hardware    Note  These part  numbers are subject to  change without notice     Note  Common  description of product is  enclosed in brackets     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C                                              Product Description Customer  Number  Rear Air Filter CN 0001 01  Bottom Air Filter CN 0002 01  Air Filter  Intake CN 0027 01  Alignment guide  XYP instrument CN 0016 01  Bar Code Scanner CN PCO03 01  Serial Cable  5 feet CN 0005 01  PC  Luminex 100 IS CN PC04 01  2 Amp  250 Volts  Fast Acting Fuse  Qty 10    CN 0019 01  3 Amp  250 Volts  Fast Acting Fuse CN 0051 01  Heater Block  XYP CN 0017 01  Wrench  Hexdrive  Ball Driver CN 0025 01  3 32     Luminex 100 IS  Version 2 3  complete CN L005 01  system   Luminex 
178. lick the desired batch  The Analysis window opens  displaying the Standards tab     3  Double click anywhere within the graph to display the  Customization dialog box  See Figure 5 46  Notice across the  dialog box are five tabs  General  Axis  Font  Color  and Style   Also notice that there are six buttons along the bottom of the  dialog box  They are the OK  Cancel  Apply  Original  Export   and Maximize buttons     x   General   Avis   Font   Color   Style    Main Title  r    Test 36 A ae   Numeric Precision   Sub Title  es      amp  Qo   Viewing Style Gnd Lines   G Coke   Boh C Y C X C None      Grid in front of data       Monochrome    C Monochrome   Symbols  Font Size   C Lage    Med    Small       Figure 5 46  Customization Dialog Box   General Tab       Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Customization Dialog Box Buttons     OK  click to update the graph s parameters with the new infor   mation and exit the Customization dialog box    Cancel  click to abort selections and exit    Apply  Apply is similar to the OK button  but does not close the  Customization dialog box  It updates graph parameter with new  information    Original  click this button to restore the edited information to  the previous or original values    Export  click this button to export data from a Metafile or BMP  graphic to a  csv output file in the batch folder file  or to the clip   board  You can also export to a printer and specify the object  size  Select the desired fea
179. ls  Date I nitials  Date  nitials  Date  nitials   Monthly   Clean sample probe Date   nitials    Wipe exterior surfaces Date I nitials    Calibrate and verify Date I nitials        Every six months                                     Replace air intake filter  Date I nitials   analyzer   Replace air intake filter  XYP Date   nitials   Replace syringe plunger seal  or Date I nitials   syringe   Check analyzer ventilation filter Date I nitials   Yearly   Replace sheath filter Date   nitials   As required   Replace fuses Date   nitials   Comments              PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Troubleshooting    Troubleshooting the  Luminex 100 IS  System    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Troubleshooting procedures help users isolate  identify  and remedy  problems with the Luminex 100 analyzer and Luminex XYP  This  chapter does not troubleshoot problems with the PC  For help with  PC problems  please call Dell Technical Support at 800 624 9896     To troubleshoot a problem  select a general symptom  Next  identify  the possible problem and remedy it with one of the solutions listed     This troubleshooting chapter supplies information for the following  topics       Power Supply Problems    Communication     Pressurization     Fluid Leaks   e Sample Probe     Calibration Problems     Acquisition Problems     Bead Detail Irregularities    Error Messages     Printing Errors     Verification    You can find answers to frequently asked questions  FAQs  on our  website  http   luminexcorp
180. lush the System        2 0 0 0    0c eee eee ee 5 44   Run an Alcohol Flush                   0 00000005 5 44   Run a Wash Cycle      0 0 0    cece eee ee eee 5 44   Set Luminex XYP Instrument Heater Temperature       5 45  Calibration Procedures          0 0 0    cece eee ee eee 5 46   Run System xMAP Calibrators                      5 47   Run System xMAP Controls                  20005 5 49   Selecting Existing CAL or CON Lots                 5 50   Importing CAL or CON Lots                 00 0   5 50   Exporting CAL or CON lots                  000   5 51  Batch Setup Procedures              00 0 0 eee eee eee ee 5 51   Importing Templates                    0000000005 5 52   Create a New Batch         0 0 0    e eee eee 5 53   Open    Batch ste ea iee enni eR eR ees 5 55   Copying and Exporting Batch Data                  5 55   Clear a Batch from the System                      5 55   Replay a Batch    0 0 0    eee eee eee 5 56   Delete a Batch  4 i212 assay vind Re gard aude es eed 5 57   Create a Multi Batch                      0000000  5 58   Open a Multi Batch         00    2c eee eee eee 5 59   Process Multiple Plates                      0000   5 60   Re Run or Recover Incomplete Batch                5 61   Scan in Samples With a Barcode Reader              5 61   Add a Patient List    eese eee eee ee 5 62   Edit a Patient List        0 0 0    eee ee eee eee 5 63   Assign Sample Dilution Factors                     5 64   Create a New Advanced Batch             
181. ly stored in the Downloaded Program  Files folder on your hard disk     View Files      Cancel    Figure 5 63  Disk Cleanup for  Selected Drive                        To delete the Message Log directory     1     2     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    In the Cleanup Utility dialog box  click Delete MsgLog  Directory     In the Cleanup Utility confirmation dialog box  click Yes     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology        To delete the batch folders     1  Inthe Cleanup Utility dialog box  click Delete Batch  Directory     2  Inthe Cleanup Utility confirmation box click Yes to delete all  the batch folders  All the folders under C  My Batches are  deleted  The C  My Batches folder remains     Daily Shutdown  Procedures    Sanitize the     Sanitize the system with 10  to 20  household bleach to  System decontaminate the sample lines and the cuvette after biohazard  contact  You should sanitize as part of your daily shutdown routine  after biohazard contact  Sanitizing uses the Luminex XYP reservoir  location because only the reservoir can accommodate the amount of  fluid necessary to sanitize the instrument         To sanitize the fluidics in the analyzer      Onthe Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract   2  Putthe bleach solution in the reservoir     3  Click OK  The plate holder retracts  and the system performs the  Sanitize command     4  Runtwo Wash commands     Run a Wash Use the wash command as part of shutdown procedure  and as  Command needed  especiall
182. lyte you want to  view  The system displays this analyte in detail  Switch between  tabs to observe the tests errors under the Errors tab and unknown  results under the Samples tab     To view the next test in the batch click Next Test  F2   To view  the previous test  click Previous Test  F3   You may also click  on the test name in the left grid control     You can invalidate or validate a standard or control in either of two  ways  In the Analysis window  use the associated buttons on the  bottom of the window  or right click in the row containing the  standard or control you want to validate or invalidate     Invalidating standards   You can invalidate or remove a standard if  doing so improves the curve fit  Observe caution when doing so     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Invalidating standards greatly affects the curve fit and subsequently  the sample results  For further instruction on assay standard curves  and the appropriateness of invalidating or removing standards   contact the assay kit manufacturer     Invalidating controls   You can invalidate or remove a control in data  analysis  However  Luminex does not recommend invalidating  controls  For further instruction on assay controls and guidelines  regarding accepting or rejecting control values  contact the assay kit  manufacturer         To validate or invalidate a standard or control entry using the  right mouse click procedure     1  Right click in the row containing the standar
183. m or Small is suggested  On occasion the graph may  automatically reduce the size of the font to produce a higher  quality image    Show Annotations  Currently  this feature is not used  This  check box allows you to remove or add the annotations from  the image    Numeric Precision  When exporting text and data from the  Export Dialog  you can define the number of decimal posi   tions at 0  1  2  or 3    Grid Lines  The Graph can contain vertical grid lines  horizon   tal grid lines  both vertical and horizontal grid lines  or no grid  lines  Select the appropriate radio button    Grid in front of data  Check this option to place the grid in  front of the data graphics  Otherwise  the data graphics are  drawn on top of the grid     Axis Tab   Use the Axis tab to change your X axis and Y axis    values and specify whether to display them as linear or log  If  you select Log  use    Auto    or ensure that the  Min  value is  greater than zero  See Figure 5 48     Test 36 Customization    x     General   Axis   Font   Color   Style                 Min  304 078 Max  12506 6               A Axis     Linear    Log   C Auto C Min C Max   Min Max  Min   6 77 Max  420                           Cancel   Original   Esport      Maximize       Figure 5 48  Customization Dialog Box   Axis Tab  Font Tab   Use the Font tab to change the appearance of the  fonts that appear in the Main Title  Sub Title  and Subset  Point   Axis Label boxes  The bottom of the dialog box displays a  sample of 
184. mber of test columns following the Sample column will depend  on the number of tests defined in the Template used to create the  batch  Each of the test columns will contain the test name for any  given test  Therefore if the Template has 3 tests named Protein A   Protein B and Protein C  then these names will appear in the 3 test  column headers in the OUTPUT CSV file  Limited to 30 characters           PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C          Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Table D 3 Statistic Column Definitions       Column Name    Description          Total Events    one of the defined regions     The number of events that fell with in the defined DD gate and into one  of the defined regions for a test in the batch  For example  if a  template had 3 tests defined and the batch had counts of 100  102 and  105 for the tests  then the total count would be 307  even though more  events may have been detected that did not fall within the DD gate or          Notes    Sample notes             PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 IS OUTPUT CSV file with no additional features enabled     Program   Luminex 100 IS  409        Build   2 3 BETA         Date   7 28 2004   2 12 01 PM            SN   LX10001298011BE         Session   Bead 22 Quant Batch         Operator   Joe User                     Samples   8   Min Events   0            Results            DataType    Median         Location   Sample   Test 22   Total Events   Notes       
185. minex XYP to the PC    0 0 0    0 0    eee B 3  Install the Luminex XYP Instrument Sample Probe         B 6  Power On System Components                  0 000  B 8  Accept the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software  License Agreement       00       cece eee B 8  Adjust the Sample Probe Vertical Height                 B 8  Install the Luminex X YP Instrument Reservoir            B 9  Calibrate and Verify the System                       B 10  Install the SD System      0 0 0 0    eee eee eee B 10  Install the Luminex XYP Instrument Heater Block         B 13  Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software Installation                   B 14  Luminex 100 Version 1 7 with Windows 98 to  Luminex 100 IS Version 2 3           0 00002 cee eee B 15  Install NeW BC    eue ede Somes med B 15  Install Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software                B 15  Verify Successful Upgrade                    0    B 16  Luminex 100 Version 1 7 with Windows 2000 to  Luminex 100 IS Version 2 3           00 000 eee eee B 17    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Contents    vil    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Archive    My Sessions  folder                   4  B 17  Remove Luminex LMAT Software                  B 17  Remove Luminex 100 Version 1 7 Software           B 18  Install Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software                 B 19  Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 2 2 to Luminex 100 IS  Version 2 3    o epe om HA E on dee e oe B 19  Backup Luminex 100 IS 2 1 or 2 2 Database           B 19  Remove Luminex 100 IS 2 1 or 2 2 
186. mmands  right click on the corner  marker or plate layout and select Clear Off Plate Cmd s   See  Figure 5 39     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology         General   Bead Set Plate Layout      Right click the grid to display the popup command menu       Establish the offplate commands to run before the plate begins          Acquire Data       Cmd Name No   Cmd Name  Warmup 1  Reservoir Wash  Prime  Backflush  Sanitize              Cancel             Clear All              Reservoir Soak  Self Test                OK   Cancel      Figure 5 40  Plate Layout Tab  Off Plate Commands    12  Insert off plate commands  You can insert off plate commands    13     that run after a single well  after a range of wells  or after rows or  columns of wells  The prompt sentence displayed should be  appropriate for your selection  For example  if you select row B   the prompt    Establish the off plate commands to run after wells  B1 through B12    appears     To establish insert off plate commands  select the desired wells   then right click over the plate layout  Select Insert Off Plate  Cmd s  from the menu  Select the desired commands and click  OK  The background of the established wells turn green     To clear insert off plate commands  select the wells to clear   right click on the plate layout and select Clear Selection from  the menu     After you define the information on the General  Bead Set  and  Plate Layout tabs  click OK  Click Cancel to abort     Table
187. mple probe is not  properly aligned     There is a clog in the fluid line     Delta Cal temp out of range     There is a problem with the kit     Verify that you properly mixed  the samples before dispensing  into the wells     Verify that you loaded the  sample to the correct well on the  plate     Verify that the sample volume  added to the well is correct     Clean the sample probe  See     Clean the Sample Probe    on  page 6 4     Align the sample probe  See  page B 8     Run the following commands   Backflush  Drain  Alcohol  Flush  Wash     Verify that the delta cal  temperature is within   3 0  degrees  Recalibrate if outside  these limits and retry     Verify that the system is  functioning properly by running  the system controls  Run system  controls  If they pass  contact  the kit manufacturer        PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Cannot calculate inverse  function    xMAP Technology    This error message encompasses a range of mathematical errors  often indicating that the sample result was negative or invalid  This  is according to the parameters defined by the formula used to  analyze the sample results  Standards  assay controls  and  unknowns may all be flagged with Unknown Formula Failure  A  standard curve is plotted using the MFI and expected concentration  value  An Unknown Formula Failure message may occur when the  system is unable to calculate a standard concentration from the  standard curve     You are using th
188. mples have been run   Make a copy of this page to fill out and return with the system     Complete the following checklist  signed and dated  and return it  with the Luminex 100 analyzer    1  Remove all specimens  disposables  and reagents from the system    2  Disconnect the sheath line going from the SD system to the analyzer     3  Connecta sheath bottle filled with a solution of 1096 to 2096 household  bleach and water to the analyzer     4  Sanitize the system using the Sanitize command on the main screen of  the system  Follow this by washing twice with distilled water     5  Disconnect the system from AC power by turning off the power switch  on the rear of the system  then unplugging the analyzer power cord  from the wall source     6  Disconnect the SD system and waste and sheath containers     7  Rinse the waste container with 10  to 20  household bleach solution  and drain     8  Wash all exterior surfaces with a mild detergent  followed by a 10  to  20  bleach solution     9  Open both front doors of the analyzer and clean all accessible surfaces  with mild detergent followed by a 1096 to 20  bleach solution     10  Pack the system within a biohazard bag  place it in the corrugated box   then insert it in its original packaging or an approved shipping  container  Attach this checklist to the top of the corrugated box prior to  packaging in the crate                                   Was there an internal leak in the system  Yes No  Print Name    Signature    Date
189. mpleted Time  5 25 2001 11 10 05 AM CommandName  Acquire Patient 4 CommandNo  15 of 15   51 Command Started Time  5 25 2001 11 09 50 AM CommandName  Acquire Patient 4 CommandNo  15 of 15   50 Command Completed Time  5 25 2001 11 09 50 AM CommandName  Acquire Patient 3 CommandNo  14 of 15   49 Command Started Time  5 25 2001 11 09 34 AM CommandName  Acquire Patient 3 CommandNo  14 of 15   48 Command Completed Time  5 25 2001 11 09 33 AM CommandName  Acquire Patient 2 CommandNo  13 of 15   47 Command Started Time  5 25 2001 11 09 18 AM CommandName  Acquire Patient 2 CommandNo  13 of 15   46 Command Completed Time  5 25 2001 11 09 17 AM CommandName  Acquire Patient 1 CommandNo  12 of 15    AR Cammand Ctartad Tima  BINEINNNA ALASAN ANA Carnamandlama  Acauira Datiant 4 Carnamandila 19 af 146        j    Figure 5 10  Message Log             The log displays actions in color coded text and shading  Items in the  Message Log appear in the following color codes       Green text represents a successful system calibration   verification command  acquisition  or maintenance functions     e Red text represents failed commands  errors  or warnings   e Black text represents normal processes and actions   e Yellow shading indicates that a detailed description about the    processes or actions is available  This color may vary depending  on your tool tip color system settings     To view details of a message  double click the shaded row  A  dialog box opens providing details  To clear the Mes
190. mport  and Export buttons in the Update CAL Targets and Update CON  Targets dialog boxes     Review the lot information and press OK to select the calibration lot         To import system CAL or CON lots     1  Onthe Maintenance tab  click New CAL Targets or New CON  Targets as appropriate  An Update CAL Targets or Update  CON Targets dialog box opens     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Exporting CAL or  CON lots    Batch Setup Procedures    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    4          1     Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Click Import CAL or Import CON as appropriate  The Open  dialog box opens     To select the calibration lot or control lot to import  click the  drop down arrow for the Look in box  Browse for the  appropriate folder  diskette  or CD location  The file type is a  lif  file     After you select the location  the available lots display in the  selection list  Click the name of the lot to import and click Open   The lot name appears in the product information box  The lot and  target information is displayed on the Update dialog box     Click OK to complete the operation   To export system CAL or CON lots     On the Maintenance tab  click New CAL Targets or New CON  Targets  An Update CAL Targets or Update CON Targets  dialog box opens  Ensure you have the desired lot to export  displayed or selected     Click Export CAL or Export CON as appropriate     In the Save As dialog box  select the folder  directory  where  you want to export the lot a
191. must  be monitored manually  Check the  sheath fluid level before starting a  run or procedure     Waste Fluid  Container  Optical  xMAP Technology  Reagents    xMAP Technology    For proper operation  place the Luminex SD system at the same level  as the base of the Luminex XYP instrument  Do not put it on top of  the Luminex 100 analyzer     Warning  If biological samples have been tested with the  system  use your standard laboratory safety practices     The waste fluid container receives waste from the system  The waste  container should not be placed on top of the instrument     Caution  Waste levels must be manually monitored  Do not  allow the waste container to overflow    The optical system consists of the optical assembly and the excitation    lasers  The optical assemblies do not require manual adjustment by  the user     The xMAP technology reagent system consists of classification  calibration microspheres  reporter calibration microspheres   classification control microspheres  and reporter control  microspheres     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       Background  Information    Fluidics    Excitation    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Basic Concepts    xMAP technology is a versatile system that measures soluble  analytes  The Luminex 100 IS system performs simultaneous   discrete measurements of multiple microsphere based reactions from  a single specimen aliquot  For more conceptual information  refer to  Practical Flow Cytometry  3rd edition  by Howard M  Shapiro  M 
192. n  reads the same as the sheath pressure you recorded in  step 4  The system should stabilize at this sheath pressure  The  air pressure should be the same as you recorded in step 4  within  0 1 psi     If the Prime cycle ends before you have completed the  adjustment  select Prime again and continue to adjust the  regulator     7  Calibrate the system again  Observe the sheath pressure  displayed on the Diagnostic tab  System Monitor section  during  the calibration cycle  The pressure should be within 0 1 psi of the  pressure recorded in Step 4     Follow up with installing the heater block  below   if necessary     Use the Luminex X YP instrument heater block as required by your  assay kit instructions  This is an optional step  When not in use  store  the heater block in the bracket inside the left access door of the  Luminex 100 analyzer     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Luminex 100 IS 2 3  Software  Installation    xMAP Technology        To install the Luminex XYP instrument heater block     1  Onthe Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract to eject the plate  holder     2  Insert the Luminex XYP instrument heater block on the plate  holder  See Figure B 14        Figure B 14 The Luminex XYP Instrument Heater Block    3  Click Eject Retract to retract the plate holder     4  Turn the heater on and set the temperature  Refer to Set Luminex  XYP Instrument Heater Temperature  page 5 45      For new system installations  perform the preliminary commands  listed in 
193. n 3 3  insert off plate commands  establish 5 70  installing   XYP heater block B 13   XYP reservoir B 9   XYP sample probe B 6  instrument   operation 2 1   status 2 8  instrument operation 2 7  integrity 4 2  intended use  general system 1 1    K    kit manufacturer 4 2    L    label type specifications 3 7  labels 2 3  2 7  laboratory reagents 3 3  laboratory testing 1 1  laser 4 1  analyzer 2 6  apertures 2 6  bar code reader 2 7  information 2 5  location 2 6  radiation 2 6  warnings 2 5  leaks 2 4  light  protect from 4 2  light emission 2 8  location 2 8  Luminex 7 1  Luminex 100 analyzer  maintenance functions B 9  Luminex 100 IS 4 1  general laboratory use 1 1  specifications 3 7  Luminex 100 IS analyzer and XYP 2 3  Luminex 100 IS software 1 1    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Index    Luminex xMAP microspheres 4 2  Luminex xMAP technology 4 1  Luminex XYP specifications 3 6    M    maintenance  reports 4 3  5 87  tab B 9  maintenance schedule  annual 6 10  as required 6 11  daily 6 1  monthly 6 4  routine tasks 6 2  semi annual 6 5  weekly 6 3  manual adjustment 3 12  marketing 2 3  mechanical 2 2  2 7  message log 4 2  MFI 5 76  microsphere 4 1  4 2  microtiter plate 4 1  monitor the system 4 2  monitor waste fluid  refill sheath container 6 2  multi analyte 4 1    N  needle 4 1    0    off plate commands 5 69  operation of instrument 2 1  optical 3 12  optical assembly 3 12  optical integrity 4 2  optics 3 5   specifications 3 5  options 4 2    P    paths 4 1   pat
194. n t properly  pressurized     Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4     Ensure that the sample probe is  not clogged and there are no  leaks in the syringe seal or  syringe valve        PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Sample arm stuck in the down  position     The sample probe height is too  low  or the path to the well is  blocked     DO NOT turn off the Luminex  XYP instrument     1  Remove the blue light  housing from the Luminex  100    2  Unscrew the tubing  connector that connects the  sample tube to the top of the  sample arm  The system  monitor changes from     Busy    to    Running    and  sample acquisition  continues  Click Cancel to  make adjustments before  continuing with the rest of  the samples    3  Ifthe sample arm still does  not raise  save all the data  that has been collected to  this point  Turn off the  analyzer  but keep the XYP  instrument on    4  Exit the Luminex IS  Software    5  Turn the analyzer back on  and restart the software    6  Replace the sample tubing  and blue light  Adjust the  sample arm    7  Runacalibration with DI  water to reset the sample  probe optical switch        Sample arm does not go down  smoothly     The 96 well plate is incorrectly  seated in the XYP instrument     The 96 well plate is warped     The sample arm is misaligned     Adjust the 96 well plate     Inspect the 96 well plate   Replace it if it is warped     Readjust the sample arm  horizontal alignment 
195. nced Batch    New Batch    New CAL Targ     New CON Targ     New Lot    Open Batch    Open Help    Open Incomplete Batch    Open Multi Batch    Pause    xMAP Technology    Assay developers use New Advanced Batch to acquire data without  having to build templates  This provides the developer with a faster  and more convenient tool to develop assays  It does not store the  results in the Luminex IS 2 3 database  It writes raw data to the  output csv file if Auto Export is selected  and writes run files if  Enable Raw Storage is selected  This feature is the primary use of the  Acquisition Detail tab  When you click on the New Advanced Batch  button  the Options dialog box opens  where you enter information  about the batch  define bead events for the session  and define  commands for plate layout     Opens a dialog box in which you select a template to create a new  batch in the Luminex Batch Setup window     Opens the Update CAL Targets dialog box  in which you enter  information about the calibration microspheres you are using to  calibrate the system     Opens the Update CON Targets dialog box  in which you enter  information about the control microspheres you are using to verify  system calibration     Opens the Open Template dialog box  from which you select a  template to which you want to add a lot or edit lot information     1  The Open Batch command selected from the file menu or toolbar  opens the Open Batch Dialog box  from which you choose an  existing batch to use 
196. ncludes the following hardware     e  Luminex 100 analyzer   e Computer  PC   monitor  and accessories   e Luminex XYP instrument   e  Luminex Sheath Delivery System  Luminex SD        Power cables   e Alignment guide     Two long sample probes   e Luminex XYP instrument sample probe   e Reservoir     Shield   e Heater block   e Sheath fluid container   e Waste container   e Sheath fluid line   e Air line   e Sheath fluid intake line   e Communications  1 serial communication cable    Communications  1 USB communication cable      Communications  1 CANBUS communication cable  short  cable     e Barcode reader  e Sample probe height alignment kit    3 32 Hexdrive  Balldriver wrench    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    xMAP Technology  Reagents    Required  Laboratory  Reagents    Luminex 100 IS 2 3  Software    Luminex 100 IS  Performance  Specification    Speed    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    The System    e Classification calibration microspheres  CAL1   e Reporter calibration microspheres  CAL2    e Classification control microspheres  CON1    e Reporter control microspheres  CON2    e Sheath fluid    e Household bleach  e 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol    Mild detergent    Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software provides complete control of the  system and performs data analysis  Your Luminex 100 IS 2 3 system  is preloaded with the Luminex software  However  we supply a  software CD should you need to reinstall the software     This software requires a dedicated system 
197. nex 100 IS 2 3 Software    The menu bar contains the following menus  File Menu  Tools Menu   and Help Menu     File menu   contains the following commands     Import Template  New Batch   Open Batch  Delete Batch   Edit Patient List  Open Incomplete Batch  Batch Comment  New Multi Batch  Open Multi Batch  Data Analysis  Export Batch Data  Print Report   Exit    Tools menu   contains the following commands     Connect   Disconnect  Database Backup  Database Restore  Erase Database  Update CAL Targets  Update CON Targets  New Assay Lot  Options   Cleanup    For information on each of these commands  see the Commands  section  beginning on page 5 31     Help menu   this contains menu selections that open the online help    and describe the software and hardware     Contents opens the online help   About the Device opens a dialog box that shows the version  and serial numbers of the Luminex instruments you are using   About the Software opens a dialog box that shows the  version of the Luminex Software you are using     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Toolbar    The shortcut buttons on the toolbar can be found in other locations in  the software  The Help button opens the online help  The Single Step  option on the toolbar allows you to pause the system in between each  command or sample acquisition within a batch           mE gy H  25  QA o sse    ud    1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13       1  Import Template 8  Print Report   2  New Batch 9  Connect to t
198. nly the 100 most   recent acquired events  The Density Dot Plot displays a constant  accumulation of events  Increasing density is indicated by  contrasting colors  See Table 5 2 for the density dot plot color  legend     Table 5 2  Dot Plot Color Legend             Layer Color  0 none  1 dark blue  2 pink  3 dark green  4 cyan  5 light blue  6 light green  T orange  8 dark red                The density dot plot allows visual elimination of data values  determined to be insignificant to the display  Luminex recommends  you collect your data in density dot plot mode to observe all    5 16 PN 89 00002 00 07 1 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    collected events  Post acquisition does not display decaying dot plot   it s only a real time function     Status Bar The Status Bar displays information about the Command State   Device Status  Device Activity  Laser Status  Total Events per  Second  and Region Events per Second  Color coding indicates the  urgency of each item s status  Device Activity uses no color coding     Command State    Device Statue    Device Activity  Laser Status Total vente Sec  Region tente see   Idling A e          Figure 5 15  System Status Bar    Table 5 3 describes the types of status bar messages in relation to the    message color coding     Table 5 3  Status Bar Color Coding             Device Status    Category Color Indicates  Command Indicates communication status of the Luminex analyzer or  State operations being pr
199. ntain all proprietary notices on all copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT   e You may not distribute copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to third parties     You may not reverse engineer  decompile  disassemble  or otherwise attempt to derive source  code from the SOFTWARE PRODUCT     You may not copy  other than one backup or archival copy   distribute  sublicense  rent  lease   transfer or grant any rights in or to all or any portion of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT     e You must comply with all applicable laws regarding the use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT    e You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT    e You may not use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT in a computer based service business or publicly  display visual output of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT      You may not transmit the SOFTWARE PRODUCT over a network  by telephone  or  electronically by any means     3  TERM AND TERMINATION  Your rights under this EULA are effective until termination  You may  terminate this EULA at any time by destroying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT  including all computer  programs and documentation  and erasing any copies residing on your computer equipment  Luminex  may terminate this EULA upon thirty  30  days written notice to you  Your rights under this EULA  automatically terminate without further action on the part of Luminex if you do not comply with any of the  terms or conditions of this EULA  Upon any termination of this EULA  you agree to destroy the  SOFTWARE PRODUCT and erase any copies residing
200. ntrol  ConL 1   amp  8 H1 Plate1 Acquire Control  ConL 1  Created By  9 A2 Plate1  Acquire Patient 2 Lg    lt Name gt  10 B2  Plate1   Acquire Patient 2 Load Pa List  11 C2 Plate1   Acquire Patient 2   Template Info                              12 D2  Plate1   Acquire Patient 1  13 E2 Plate1   Acquire Patient 1 9  Name  14 F2 Plate1  Acquire Patient 1 Help   B36 RepQt Assay 15  G2 Plate1 Acquire Patient 1 ley  ADILA Mlata A Am Manti annt A  Description              Replicate Simplex Quant New Lot          C Save only         Standard Info  bd Product No  3000    C     9 C 9C IC 9 C 96 9C 9    Product Name  36 Repat Kit  Version No  PYIYYYYY     9  Lot Name  36Repatstd  2227 DODD ODD  0 Expiration Date  06 10 2005    Control Info  Product No  3000  Product Name  36 RepOt Kit  Lot Name  36Repe tCon  Expiration Date  06 10 2005             Developing Co                                The following features are part of the Batch Setup Window       Batch Info group box     Template Info group box     nsert command     Command list    5 20 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software      Microtiter Plate image     Command button group box    Save group box   e Standard Info group box     Control Info group box     New Lot button    The Batch Info group box has text boxes in which you can input the  name  description  and creator name of a new batch     The Template Info group box shows the name  description  version
201. nts detected per second that are    Events Second   classified in a region                The Status Bar displays status information as the software processes  commands  Table 5 4 shows the typical messages that appear in the  status bar  Additionally  information displays as text on the  Diagnostics tab     5 18 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Table 5 4  Status Bar    Communication Message Details       Status Bar  Color    Message    Indicates          Green    Idle    Waiting to process the next  command        Standby    The Luminex analyzer is ready  and waiting to perform a  command        Yellow    Connecting    The software is attempting to  connect to the instrument        Processing    The instrument is communicating  with the software as it processes  commands        Pausing    The instrument has stopped  processing the list of commands   but finishing the active command        Paused    The software stopped processing  the list of commands  A  resume   function becomes available to  change the state back to   processing         Busy    The instrument is processing a  maintenance command        Red    Disconnected    The software has not yet  attempted to connect or fails to  connect to the instrument              Locked Out       Another application currently has  control of the instrument  The  software locks out as long as the  other application runs  To remove  the locked out stat
202. ocessed  Green Idle or processing  Yellow Connecting  pausing  or paused  Red Disconnected or locked out       Indicates the current process of or warning about the  Luminex analyzer             Green Running or standby   Yellow Busy  pressurizing  sheath is empty  or warming  up   Red Not ready or disconnected          Device  Activity          Indicates the activity that the Luminex analyzer is  performing  Note  The device activity has no color code           PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Table 5 3  Status Bar Color Coding  Continued        Category Color Indicates          e     Idling  waiting for a command      Aspirating  drawing in sample   e Collecting Data  collecting data     Sanitizing  sanitizing the instrument     Washing  washing the sample line      Priming  priming the instrument      Calibrating  calibrating the instrument     Canceling  canceling a command   e  Backflushing  backflushing the instrument   e Draining  draining the instrument     Warming Up  warming up the instrument   e  Verifying  verifying calibration   e Soaking  soaking the probe   e Adjusting sample probe   e Self Diagnosing  performing self diagnostic  routine          Laser Status Laser temperature and readiness status                      Green Lasers warmed up  Yellow Warmup timer countdown in seconds from 1800  Red Lasers off   Total Events    Number of total bead events detected per second   Second   Region Number of bead eve
203. on     Click Save  The system applies the lot you just created to the  template     To edit information for an existing lot     On the Home tab  click New Lot  The Open Template dialog  box opens     Highlight the template that you want to edit and click Select  The  Update Lot Information dialog box opens  See Figure 5 44     Import   Export    amp w2   x  tot tet Revert  Save   Cancel    Change the current lot by saving selected lot   r Test Standards  2000 Current Lot  B3654QtStd    Current Lot  z  Newiot   Delete Lot   Exp  Date   06 05 2008     7              Update Lot Information       Test 54                      r Test Controls  2000 Current Lot  B3654QtCon  Current Lot   B36540tCon    NewLot   DeleteLot  Exp  Datefo3 07 2003  gt      Low Limit Expected Values   High Limit         Test 36 Test 54   mg dL mg dL  150 405                      Figure 5 44  Update Lot Information Dialog Box    3  Change or edit the expiration date and the lot concentration    values     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    4     xMAP Technology    Click Save  The system updates the lot changes and applies them  to the template     Edit Lot   4 To edit lots on a used template  may have new lot number of  Information on a reagents  but are using same template      Used Template    1     On the Home tab  click New Lot  The Open Template dialog  box opens     Double click the template that you want to edit  An Update Lot  Information dialog box opens  See Figure 5 44     Change or edit t
204. on the system  monitor  on the Diagnostics tab  is more than  3 degrees     e if sample acquisition is problematic     Each step in the calibration procedure usually takes less than one  minute  You must run xMAP controls after each calibration  Once  calibrated  the calibration values remain until you calibrate again   You can track system calibration and verification results through the  Calibration Trend Report and the System Control Trend report  If  you need target value information for Calibration or Control  microspheres  you can find the information on the Luminex website  at http  Avww luminexcorp com  Click on the Support link then  navigate to the FAQ page on the Support page     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Run System xMAP  Calibrators    Note  When dispensing calibra   tion and control microspheres   hold the bottle upside down at  a 90 degree angle to the micro   titer plate to ensure that you are  getting accurate drop volume     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Ensure that the Luminex analyzer lasers are warmed up and the  probe height is set correctly before calibrating the system  Do not  move the system waste line while calibrating     You can run calibration and verification commands from the  Maintenance tab  You can import and export calibration and control  lots and reuse existing lot information for calibration and controls         To calibrate your system with xMAP calibrators     1  Vortex the xMAP 
205. on to the exported batch file  output csv      Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Export Location Label Style  Choose one of these options to  define the label data style exported to the Output csv file  You can  select sequential numbering  by plate location  or both  default      2151 x   General   Company Information Data Export    Iv Auto Export Batches   Additional Batch Information  iv Copy Output csv to Common Output Dir   I Prompt for Batch Comment  I Write Sample Comments    Additional Export Stats                         Template Version  Template Desc           l Mean I Trimmed  CV  gt   F  CV    Trimmed Peak       Template Dev  Co    o  F Peak    Trimmed Std Dev     Template Author       z     Std Dev    Avg Results Sample Volume        I Trimmed Count  I Trimmed Mean                       Test Sort Order                       Export Location Label Style                       Alphabetical by Test Name   Sequential   1 2 3      C Sequential by Region ID C Plate Location   A1  B1  C1                   C Template Setup Order C Both   1 A1   2 B1   3 C1                  p OK 4 Feri    Figure 5 23  Options Dialog Box   Data Export Tab    Setting up the Favorites     To add templates to the Favorites list   List     On the Favorites list  click Add Template     2  Inthe Open Template dialog box  double click the template to  add to your Favorites list         To add commands to the Favorites list     1  Click Add Commands from the Favorites list  
206. opens  To create a new lot when  there is an existing lot  click New Lot on the Standard or  Control section of the dialog box  A New Standard Lot or  New Control Lot dialog box opens  Enter the standard or  control lot number  See Figure 5 42 and Figure 5 43     3  Click OK   New Standard Lot Number New Control Lot Number    Td  OK   Cancel      Figure 5 42  Add Lot Standard and Control Dialog Boxes    Import   Expot    amp we3   x  Lot Lot Revert Save Cancel    Change the current lot by saving selected lot     Test Standards  2000 Current Lot  B3654QtStd    Current Lot   B36540tSta v  NewLot Delete Lot   Exp  Date   06 05 2003 F          Update Lot Information                        Test Controls  2000 Current Lot  B3654QtCon  Current Lot   B36540tCon    NewLot   DeleteLot  Exp  Datefos 07 2003          Low Limit Expected Values   High Limit      Test 36 Test 54  imgidL   mg dL  Con Normal 150 405                      Figure 5 43  Update Lot Information Dialog Box    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Edit Lot  Information on an  Unused Template    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C         1     Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Enter the expiration date in the Exp  Date field     Enter the standard concentration values provided in the kit  manufacturer s instructions  See Figure 5 43     Enter the control reagent values  The controls are divided into 3  separate tabs  Low Limit  Expected Value  or High Limit  All  information must be defined to enable the Save butt
207. ot button is visible only if the template you are using  requires the use of standards or controls  The button opens the  Update Lot Information dialog box  in which you can manage lot  information     When the system analyzes batches  it displays the data in a three tab  format within the Analysis window  The following three tabs present  the batch information in greater detail     e Errors tab   lists errors that occur during batch acquisition  such  as controls that failed    e Standards tab   lists all tests in the batch  a regression chart for  each test  and the standards or controls associated with the batch    e Samples tab   lists background samples and all samples or  unknowns acquired in the batch with either a qualitative or  quantitative result     Nine function buttons are available on the lower portion of the  Analysis window  These buttons perform tasks or functions that are  relevant to the Standards tab although they appear on all three tabs of  the Analysis window  The buttons are     e Next Test  F2    e Previous Test  F3    e   nvalidate Standard  F4    e Validate Standard  F5    e   nvalidate Control  F6    e Validate Control  F7    e Change Standard   only if Developer s Workbench is installed   e Change Lot  Alt   F8     e  Recalc  Standards tab only    only available on the Standards tab   and only if the Auto checkbox is not selected     For a description of these commands  see    Commands    on page 5   31  For information on procedures using these 
208. ottom wells   stack two of  the smaller  3 35 mm diameter  alignment discs together and  place them into the selected well     For a round bottom  U bottom  plate   stack two of the  smaller  3 35 mm diameter  alignment discs and place them into  well A1     For a plate with conical wells   place one alignment sphere into  the selected well     Select the Maintenance tab  then click Eject Retract to eject  the plate holder  Place the 96 well microtiter plate on the  Luminex XYP instrument plate holder with position A1 in the  top left corner  Click Eject Retract to retract the plate     Use the 3 32 inch hex wrench to loosen the height adjustment  locking screw  See Figure B 9     Verify that the correct location is selected with the appropriate  number of discs  The location must be the same as indicated in  the software or the location you choose  Click Sample Probe  Down to lower the sample probe     Using the thumb wheel  lower the probe until it just touches the  top of the alignment discs or sphere     Use a 3 32 inch hex wrench to tighten the height adjustment  locking screw     Click Sample Probe Up to raise the sample probe     Replace the plastic shield that covers the sample probe area     Install the Luminex XYP Use the Luminex XYP instrument reservoir for the Luminex 100  Instrument Reservoir analyzer maintenance functions     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology        To install the Luminex XYP instrument reservoir
209. page 5 50 for more details on  importing a Calibration lot     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    5 48    xMAP Technology                  Update CAL Targets             A3735  05 19 2002          Figure 5 25  Update CAL Targets Dialog Box    10  Repeat step 9 for the CAL2 lot     11  In the Maintenance tab  click CALI  then click OK  The device  status section in the status bar changes from  Running  to     Standby        12  Click CAL2  then click OK  Wait until CAL2 completes     The Device Status section in the status bar changes from    Running     to    Standby    and the Diagnostics tab turns red  The System Monitor  on the Diagnostics tab displays the date and time in green if CAL1  and CAL2 are successful     The Diagnostics tab turns red if all substances  CAL or CON  have  not been run and under the following conditions     the first time the software is opened  the first time a system is calibrated  a new database is installed   an old database is restored   a CAL or CON fails     PN 89 00002 00 07 1 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Run System xMAP  Controls    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    You must run system controls following calibration  Continue with  the following  Run System xMAP Controls  section     Run System xMAP controls to verify calibration  Dispense the  Control microspheres into the microtiter plate at the same time that  you dispense the Calibration microspheres  See    Run System xMAP  Calibrators  on page 5
210. ples  Tab    s esee DIRE PURERS KU XN OD 5 28  Replicate Averaging            0    ee eee eee eee 5 29  Commands    ice eta ete Mee Seed CUP DOR Ue x RR 5 31  Acquire Patient   1 0 0 0    eee eee res 5 31  Add Baths ies ber eng eae a ain old ok cm ER og 5 31  Alcohol Flush            lssleleeeeeeeeeeee eee  5 31  AUtOSCale 5  Ese eae Restos a e aia dae g 5 31  AULOSIZE    cos ease p d eR UR Rue RR CDS C RU C SRI e 5 31  Backfl  sh z   us oen tee ee ate doe Cae oven os 5 31  CALI 2 atta cae eem tob ente dao dotato sos 5 31  CAL  csl dee dI a dee dU recen 5 31  Cancel  Command           0 0 00  e cece eens 5 31  CanceLAIlL      21 cese e ce ER beds beg aida Gade 5 31  Change Lot      icr er enmt eee eeu 5 31  COND iacu ies ins Bases Blah aaa td 5 31  CON Z esis ead behead A ERI eee nea 5 31  Connect to Instrument                 0 00 cece ee eee 5 32  Create New Multi Batch              0 0 0  eee eee eee 5 32  Delete Bat  h isas esos ee ae Lae e SR t cs 5 32  Density Decaying          lees 5 32  Display Confirmation Screens                  0000005 5 32  Disconnect from the Instrument                   005  5 32  Drain  3  iat a hase ds ead RI ce gd ew LASS 5 32  EjecURetract   eoe o chi ane EE uper i dE 5 32  Enable Raw Data Storage          0 0 0    ce eee eee 5 32  Export Batch Data    5 32  Bxpott CAL     stow pcg trang genes e hte ibd edad   684 5 32  Export CON accu ki e ee ea ee E d 5 32  Export Data isn  cet Pic iach tinny  e ette ara es 5 33  Help  sco isa bth wk ba a
211. plug them from the  electrical outlet     Remove the light housing directly above the sample arm by  grasping and firmly pulling out  It remains attached by a wire  harness  Place it on top of the analyzer  See Figure B 6           1  Light Housing 2  Cheminert fitting with cap    Figure B 6 Light Housing Removed    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Luminex 100 IS System Setup    3  Unscrew the cap from the Cheminert fitting     4  Insert the sample probe into the sample probe holder  Insert the  Cheminert fitting into the sample probe holder  turning it  clockwise  Be careful that the threads are correctly aligned  Hand    tighten only  See Figure B 7        1  Cheminert Fitting 3  Sample Probe  2  Sample Probe Holder  Figure B 7 Insert Sample Probe and Cheminert Fitting  5  Push the light housing back into place   6  Install the clear plastic shield that covers the sample probe area   See Figure B 8     Luminex19        Figure B 8 Sample Probe Area with Clear Plastic Shield in Place    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Power On System  Components    Accept the Luminex 100  IS 2 3 Software License  Agreement    Adjust the Sample Probe  Vertical Height    xMAP Technology    7  Plug the Luminex XYP instrument and the Luminex 100  analyzer into an approved outlet     Power on the system components     e The Luminex 100 analyzer  switch on back     The Luminex XYP instrument  switch on back   e The PC and monitor  switches on front
212. r  access to service panel 2  Center door  access to syringe  Figure 3 3 Luminex 100 Analyzer Access Doors    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 3 9    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Air Intake Filler A replaceable air intake filter cleans the air used to pressurize sheath  fluid  This filter is enclosed behind an access door located on the  back of the Luminex 100 analyzer  See Figure 3 4        Figure 3 4 Air Intake Filter    Syringe The syringe delivers a sample from the 96 well microtiter plate to the  cuvette  See Figure 3 5           1  Syringe Seal 2  Syringe    Figure 3 5 Syringe and Syringe Seal    3 10 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology The System    Sheath Filter The sheath filter removes particles greater than ten microns in  diameter from the sheath fluid  See Figure 3 6        Figure 3 6 Sheath Filter    Air  Waste  and The air  waste  and sheath connectors  located on the left side of the  Sheath Fluid analyzer  connect to the SD system and waste fluid containers using  Connectors clear tubing  The air connector is green  the sheath fluid connector is  blue  and the waste fluid connector is orange  See Figure 3 7        1  Sheath fluid connector  blue   2  Air connector  green   3  Waste connector  orange     Figure 3 7 Air  Waste  and Sheath Fluid Connectors    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C 3 11    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Luminex Sheath  Delivery System    Note  If you are not using the SD  System  sheath fluid levels 
213. rawing sheath  fluid from the sheath fluid container  You do not need to supply  solution in a plate  A backflush command takes about seven seconds     Runs the Classification portion of the Luminex System calibration     Runs the Reporter portion of the Luminex System calibration     Cancels the process for the last command initiated     Cancels all the commands in progress     Opens the Change Lot dialog box from which you select a lot to  apply to a batch     Runs the verification for the Classification calibration     Runs the verification for the Reporter calibration     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Connectto Instrument    Create New Multi Batch    Delete Batch    Density Decaying    Display Confirmation  Screens    Disconnect from  the Instrument    Drain    Eject Retract    Enable Raw Data Storage  Export Batch Data    Export CAL    Export CON    5 32    xMAP Technology    Establishes a connection between the PC and the analyzer     This command opens the Luminex Multi Batch dialog box  in which  you add or create new batches to add to a multi batch     Opens the Delete Batch dialog box  which shows a listing of the  unprocessed batches in the database  When you highlight a batch and  click Select in this dialog box  the system deletes the selected batch     Toggles between the default density dot plot and the decaying dot  plot views     Enables confirmation dialog boxes to display when you initiate many  of the maintenance commands     Disconnects commun
214. rs 1 2  7 1  outside U S  1 2  phone numbers 7 1  U S A  1 2  templates 4 2  5 52  test analysis view 5 83  test rate 4 1  testing clinical samples 3 2  tests 4 1  thumb wheel B 8  troubleshooting 7 1  types B 8  microspheres 4 2  types of microtiter plate B 8    U    UL mark 2 3   unauthorized additional software 3 3  Underwriter Laboratories  Incorporated 2 3  uptake 4 1   user manual  conventions 1 1  user accessible components 3 7    V    ventilation filter  XYP 3 8  verification  command 5 47  setting well location 5 47  trend report 4 3  updating lots 5 47  View detailed test analysis 5 83  visual inspection 6 3  volume 4 1  vortex 3 7    W   warmup 6 1   warnings 2 1  2 7  2 8  5 46  6 8  biological 2 7  laser 2 5    Index 5    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    warranty 2 2   waste  connector 3 11  container 3 12  6 2  high volume 6 3   wipe exterior surfaces 6 4    X    xMAP 3 4  reagents 3 3  4 1  technology 1 1   XYP 2 3  air intake filter 6 6  heater block B 13  heater temperature 5 46  ventilation filter 3 8    Index 6    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev C    
215. s  xen           otf  H oz     UNDC    E AH  sneux3   julog JsMeyxXy josoJey e qeqoJd Joso1oy    sonsouBeiq pue uomnel eisu  104  Y e gissoqd     eqolg uous fuisN ueuM enea   Buiooo    eoeuns fumnoddng       SISEM WO1   SheUxoe JosoJee e qeqoig    6    jsneuxe  osojoe  A ejqeqoud eouejeej uoisuejxe Aes  lt 8     eoueJegp qep     7    y    SNUILUJ9  eui  ejsew Jo 11  deo   Moq    01 0     eo ep 1 euuoosip   eui ejeJedo oi jnoyiip s  1 JEU uons seorep eseui uonisod jou oq   sp109 Jewod eui ase GS xeuiun eui pue    JAX xeutuim     004 xeutun    y  10  Sjoeuuoosip eoi eq  sseooe eoueuejureui esn     YAMS Jewog  lt 9    RA   uj 0  ejdoed z sesinbes 00X7  rTenueui Jasn perjddns jo suoyonysu   uonejeisui pue BurBexoed uo suononursur Burppueu pue Buiddius wojo J  S       RA     yenuew Jesn e2u919j9J   Ajuo Buiuuee eAnoe1oJd ui sjeprno ojur pebBnjd eq pjnous sp109 eur   p        64 9726     Al Z iste 106186 was  elo p        BY LLZ   dl Sp 97 UMOYs JOU  100 j uo xog piny ujeeus      x 29  92     a  79891  1uBiem uiejs  s douejunoo  elo   E      SS999  uolIMs Jamod  JO  e2uejeo o ejqeo pue  jsneuxe exejui pue Duyooo 104 eoueJeo 5 E           By 688  qi SS  6L  QS xeuiun         By ot v2     GI 26    S  OO  xeutiuun1     Auejo 10  Buimesp siu WO1    peniuo ueeg eA eu JepeeJ epooJeq pue Od aul  4epeeJ epooJeq  Jeus eui o    Od Jjeus eur o    GS xeutum   dAX xeuiuum     00L xeumum    Sjueuoduuoo 1ofeuu G JO sjsisuoo ulejs  S S  OO  xeurum  eu Lr    S910N    B 27    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev 
216. s label appears on the back panel of the Luminex 100 analyzer  and on the back panel of the Luminex XYP instrument     Ce     1  a  MCS 800 748 0241 CE D    Figure 2 2 CE Label    The Luminex 100 analyzer and the Luminex XYP instrument  comply with European Union  EU  safety requirements and   therefore  may be marketed in the Europe Single Market     This voltage label appears on the back of the Luminex 100 analyzer     Model No  o      Luminex   09  S N LX10003101301    Luminex Corporation Laboratory  12212 Technology Blvd  Austin  Texas 78727    Manufactured in USA e US LISTED    April  2003  69uF    100 120V  200 240  1 4A 47 63 Hz  Figure 2 3 Luminex 100 Serial Number Label    The Luminex 100 analyzer has been tested by Underwriter  Laboratories  Inc     UL      Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    FCC Label    Fluidics    xMAP Technology    The following label appears on the back of the Luminex XYP  instrument        Figure 2 4 Luminex XYP Serial Number Label    The Luminex XYP instrument has been tested by UL     This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  for a Class B digital device  pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules   These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  harmful interference in a residential installation  This equipment  generates  uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and  if not  installed and used in accordance with the instructions  may cause  harmful interference to radio communications  Howev
217. s of calibration  commands performed over a specified time period    e System Control Trend Reports provide results of system controls  performed over a specified time period    e Batch Summary Reports provide batch information in a sample  versus test grid format      Quality Control Reports track the trends of assay controls over a  period of time    These reports let you look at specific details regarding the samples  you process through the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software and system  operation     System tools help you monitor the system including a display  showing real time system property values and a message log  Errors  are shown in the message log and also on your reports  You can even  add comments to specific results in some of these reports     To keep track of your reagents  the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 software  stores lot numbers  expected values  and expiration information     A comprehensive set of self diagnostic tests ensure that your system  is working correctly  These tests are performed at startup and can be  performed at any time  If any problem is detected  an error message  appears in the message log to inform you     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Main Window    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    This manual describes how to use the Luminex IS 2 3 software  It  includes a glossary and information regarding the CSV file setup   The software user should have a basic famili
218. s the Save in location  The default is  the Backup folder  directory  found in C  Program  Files Luminex Luminex 100 IS Backup     Enter the lot name for the exported lot into the File Name box     Click Save  then click OK  The dialog box closes  After you  click OK  you can use the lot target values with the next  calibration or verification     The system saves the lot to the existing software as a lot accessible    for the next calibration and or verification  Once you export the    desired calibration or control lot you can save it to disk to import to  another computer     A batch consists of a group of samples processed under control of a    template  Batches are set up using templates defined by assay kit    manufacturers  Batches consist of templates and samples for    acquisition  and can span more than one plate  Templates contain    predefined commands that must be included in every batch    acquisition     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Importing  Templates    xMAP Technology    You can group batches together as a multi batch  Multi batches can  consist of any number of batches that have been setup from different  assay templates and are processed consecutively     The assay kit manufacturer may provide templates in the kits  which  they distribute on diskette or CD  Templates typically include assay  standards  controls  and maintenance commands  such as washes or  primes to acquire along with samples   OEM manufacturers may  provide templates pre ins
219. sad hoo eed gee ais 5 33  Import Calibration          lesse 5 33  Import Control sss nc  solace clan tia wk evade 5 33  Import Template    5 33  lI  5 33  Invalidate Control    0 0 2    0 0 eee 5 33  Invalidate Standard      1 2    0    cee eee 5 33  Load Patient List     0 0 2    0    cee eee 5 33  I og Lin  ar    oce ee ort Ree der ce el e 5 33    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C iii    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology          Maximize Minimize           0 0 00  ees 5 33  Next Test ros oce esce wae irs ioe RC ent NH owe ES 5 33  New Advanced Batch          0 0 0 0    ccc eee ee ee 5 34  New  Batch  oett eU eb WR ede era tob 5 34  New CAL larg  dudes b edonne Hieteagddewsadai lt  5 34  New CON Targ   sc  oos eR eR ee eee 5 34  New Lot 55 ure tete oto OR WA ss Noe Do D bw 5 34  Open Batch    cca jes sea nee ea rii eR A sees 5 34  Open Help   oreste ete de Mee Hae wate sta 5 34  Open Incomplete Batch              0 0 0     00 00008 5 34  Open Multi Batch               0 0    5 34  hour qe  5 34  Previous  Test  epe eene qun d e y 5 35  Prime   oes oett oa Re RARE SUCK ack hers CR ode dy 5 35  Print Batch Worklist         0 0 00    5 35  Print Report    ode Leah Pad aa eia eoe ae 5 35  ler                                    H       5 35  Replay Batch           lsssleeelee eh 5 35  Report Raw Fluorescence             eleleleee ees 5 35  Resume    Seek 4 Xpacevwuew3ge te Se V Rie 5 35  Sample Probe Down            0 0    0c eee eee eee 5 35  SaliliZe  15kebesa eia
220. sage log   right click in the Message Log area  and click Clear on the menu     Acquisition Detail   The Acquisition Detail tab offers advanced batch sample monitoring  Tab and    on the fly    data acquisition without templates  The primary  function is real time monitoring of batch sampling during acquisition  through a display of sample bead statistics  histogram  and dot plot  data     During batch acquisition  bead statistics can be useful if batch errors  occur  For example  if samples are constantly failing due to  insufficient bead count  you can monitor whether the failure is due to  low bead concentration or if other assay problems are present     The Acquisition Detail tab provides access to the Developer  Workbench  DWB  software features  Details about these features  are provided in the Luminex Developer Workbench Guide Version 2 3  documentation  You must have the DWB software installed to enable  these features     Caution  Do not alter kit manufacturer   s predefined templates or    create alternative templates for off the shelf kits unless instructed  by the kit manufacturer        5 12 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Acquisition Detail tab features     Batch Name and Description  Batch Data Area  Acquisition Detail Toolbar  Histogram   Dot Plot    Figure 5 11 identifies the major features of the Acquisition Detail  tab     Sh Luminex100 IS Software    Els loos Hope Luminex    am me  gt  we EE    B4  0 pes
221. sample arm 3 8  adjusting vertical height 6 11  sample data  entering 4 2  sample details 4 3  Sample Errors 5 24  sample probe B 7  adjust B 8  clean 6 4  sample progress 5 11  samples tab 5 22  sanitize 5 45  5 96  6 1  remove air bubbles 5 44  with 70  isopropanol 5 44  sensitivity 3 4  4 1  setting 5 46  sheath filter 3 11  8 2  sheath flow rate 3 5  sheath fluid  connector 3 11  container 3 11  filling 6 2  filter 6 10  levels 6 1  product number 8 3    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    sheath fluid container 3 11  software 3 3  8 3  software overview  Luminex 100 IS software 4 2  software specifications 3 3  dedicated system 3 3  soluble analytes 4 1  specifications  3 5  accuracy precision 3 4  capacity 3 4  classification laser 3 5  electronics 3 5  fluidics 3 5  hardware 3 2  Luminex 100 analyzer 3 5  Luminex 100 IS 3 3  3 5  3 7  Luminex XYP 3 6  PC 3 6  reporter laser 3 5  sensitivity 3 4  speed 3 3  vortex 3 7  speed specifications 3 3  stability 4 2  standards tab 5 22  start up procedure 6 1  status of instrument 2 8  storage  raw data 5 39  subsystems 3 7  surge protector 3 7  surge protector specifications 3 7  symbols 2 1  syringe 3 10  4 1  syringe seal 6 8  8 2  system  drain 5 94  errors 5 24  integrity 4 2  overview 3 7  trend report 5 87  system setup  communication cables B 4  PC B 4  XYP B 4    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Index    T    tabs  samples 5 22  standards 5 22  technical support 1 2  7 1  Canada 1 2  email address 1 2  7 1  hou
222. selected  rows and    Reset    back to normal  defaults     Caption Column       Entire Column Select an entire column by clicking  the column heading  Selected     Events  or Caption                  8  Click the Plate Layout tab  See Figure 5 37  On this tab you  define commands for the desired wells on the plate  You can    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    define commands that apply to one or more wells  one or more  rows of wells  or one or more columns of wells  You can define  on plate or off plate commands           Right click the grid to display the popup command menu          1  12 3  4 5 6 7 8  9  10 11 12  OOOQOOOQOQQO  SD0DOOOOOOOOOO  goOoOOOOOOOOOO  8a 0D0O0OOOOOOOQO  goOOOOOOOOOOQO  goOOoQOooooooQO  FOOOCOOOOO0O00O  HOOQOOOOOOOO0OO       OK   Cancel         Note  Wells are always read in    rows  letters A to H  and col   umns  numbers 1 to 12  start   ing with A1  If partial  columns are selected they are  still read in the same order   10     Figure 5 37  Plate Layout Tab    Select wells  To select a single well  click the well  To select  multiple wells in a group  click and hold the mouse button with  the cursor over the first well  then drag the cursor around the  desired wells  To select a row or column click the letter or  number of the row or column     Select plate commands  Right click over the selected wells to  display the Command menu  See Figure 5 38  Select the desired  command  The associated command symbol appears in
223. sted  CSA certified  CE marked for nondomestic use when  used internationally     Printer  HP LaserJet 2300 or available equivalent    Use the Code 128 barcode label type when scanning barcode labels  into the system as patient identities     VWR product number 58816 121  Speed range 0 3200 rpm or  equivalent    Cole Parmer   product number 08849 00  Operating frequency 55  kHz or equivalent    The system consists of three subsystems  electronic  fluidic  and  optical  The following section describes the user accessible  components of each subsystem     The power input modules contain the on off switch and fuses     The communications port connects the Luminex 100 analyzer or the  Luminex XYP instrument to the computer  and the Luminex SD  system to the Luminex 100 analyzer     Located on the bottom of the Luminex 100 analyzer  the filter must  be checked and cleaned as necessary  For proper ventilation  do not  obstruct the area below and allow at least two inches  5 cm  of  clearance around the Luminex 100 analyzer     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    Luminex XYP The XYP instrument ventilation filter cleans the air that cools the  Instrument internal parts of the Luminex XYP instrument  See Figure 3 1     Ventilation Filter    1       1  Air intake filter access door 5  Communication Ports  DB9   2  Power Switch 6  XYP Communication Port  DB9   3  Power Input Module 7  Analyzer ventilation filter     on bottom of analyzer   4  XYP ventilation Filter
224. stem draws sheath fluid from the sheath  fluid container and sends it directly to waste  You do not need to  supply solution in a plate  A backflush takes between 10 and 30  seconds       To clear obstructions from the cuvette   Click Backflush  then click OK to verify that you want to back   flush the system   The status bar shows that the backflush command is processing     Alcohol flush the system to remove air bubbles from the sample  tubing and the cuvette using 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol  The  cuvette is the principal fluid pathway within the optics component of  the system where the system reads the sample       To remove air bubbles from the sample tubing and cuvette     1  On the Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract    2  A confirmation dialog box opens telling you to place solution in  the reservoir     3  Put 70  isopropanol or 70  ethanol in the reservoir     4  Click OK  The plate holder retracts  and the system performs the  Wash command     Use the wash cycle after an alcohol flush or as needed  For example   wash four times with distilled water after calibration and twice with    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Set Luminex XYP  Instrument Heater  Temperature    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    distilled water after Sanitize  Place at least 200 uL in a microtiter  well or fill the Luminex XYP reservoir with distilled water  Washing  takes about 30 seconds     You should wash after calibration and verification
225. strument  or Luminex SD system  refer to Luminex 100 IS 2 3  Firmware Installation  page B 21      Before connecting the system components  ensure that the facility  complies with all system and safety requirements  Read the safety  information that begins in Warnings and Notes  page 2 2   Position  the instrument to minimize temperature fluctuations     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    The following sections describe how to connect the Luminex 100 IS  system components  An Installation Drawing  page B 27  provides  clearances and other related information  Figure B 1 shows the  components of the system and how they should be placed     Perform the following procedures to set up the system  Each of these  steps can be found on the page number shown in parentheses     1  Connect the Luminex 100 analyzer and Luminex XYP to the PC   page B 3     2  Install the Luminex XYP Instrument Sample Probe  page B 6   3  Power On System Components  page B 8     4  Accept the Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software License Agreement   page B 8     5  Adjust the Sample Probe Vertical Height  page B 8    6  Install the Luminex XYP Instrument Reservoir  page B 9   7  Calibrate and Verify the System  page B 10    8  Install the SD System  page B 10     9  Install the Luminex XYP Instrument Heater Block  page B 13        1  Monitor 4  Barcode Scanner  2  PC 5  Luminex SD system  3  Luminex XYP Instrument 6  Luminex 100 Analyzer    Figure B 1 Luminex 100 IS System Setup    PN 89 0
226. system  PC and Luminex Data Collector  software  and the Luminex 100 analyzer and XYP instrument  This  section does not address communication issues with other peripheral  devices       The term    Communication    refers to      The transfer of data between the PC and the analyzer      The current status of the analyzer and XYP instrument      nstrument readbacks        nstrument control  sample acquisition  session uploading  and  start  stop and pause features        Symptom    Possible problem Solution       PC cannot initialize  communication with analyzer     The communication cable is Check the communications  unplugged  or plugged into the cable connections   wrong port     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    The XYP or the LX 100 power    Is not turned on     Troubleshooting    Turn off the PC and then turn on  the LX100  XYP  and then the  PC        Pressurization Normal air and sheath pressure readings vary between 6 9 psi  while the compressor runs  If the system pressure is out of  range  your sample acquisition will fail or return poor results    Symptom Possible problem Solution    Pressurization fails or  pressure is too low     The sheath and waste lines are  not fully connected     An air leak is present in the  sheath bottle     The sheath or waste bottle  fittings are cracked     There is a leak in the system     The compressor does not  engage     The Cheminert Fitting is loose     Fluid leaks in the system     The sheath bottle has an air  l
227. t  up the system  The dialog box prompts you to verify that the lot  information for CAL 1  CAL2  CONI  and CON  reagents are    correct     5  Click OK to verify that the lot information is accurate     Table 5 11 shows a recommended schedule for maintenance    operations     Table 5 11  Maintenance Operations   Recommended Use Schedule       Operation    Recommended Use Schedule          Warmup    Daily  After four hours of system inactivity       Prime    Daily   To remove air from sheath fluid tubing  After performing these actions        refilling the sheath container       removing and replacing sheath container      changing the sheath fluid filter       changing the syringe seal       Backflush    Troubleshooting and preventative   maintenance purposes only        to remove obstructions from the cuvette       if fluid does not flow through the waste tub   ing during prime cycles or during sample  acquisition       if fluid drips from the sample probe during  priming and forms puddles of fluid on the  plate          Alcohol Flush       Daily  Before system calibration  After changing the sample probe    To remove air bubbles from the cuvette using  7096 isopropanol or 7096 ethanol       PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       xMAP Technology    Drain the Analyzer    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Table 5 11  Maintenance Operations   Recommended Use Schedule  Continued        Operation Recommended Use Schedule          Sanitize   To decontamin
228. t Test  F2  Invalidate Standard  F4   invalidate Control  F6    Change Formula  F8  ipid PUER  Previous Testis    Validate Standard  FS    _ Validate Control F7        Change Lot  AIt F8     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C         0o  fv Auto             Alphabetically  by Sample ID        Figure 5 16  Analysis Window   Errors Tab Open    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Table 5 5  Error Categories       System and Assay Errors    Sample Errors          Instrument Not Calibrated  Failed Verification  system lists  each failed control    Failed Control  verifier failed   Temperature Divergence from    Insufficient Bead Count  Sample High Low  Analyzer Error   High Sheath Pressure  Low Sheath Pressure    Calibration Temperature   Sample Timeout    Failed Curve Fit   Sample Empty    Analysis Error   Cannot Calculate Inverse  e  APD Temp Range Exceeded Function     XYP Temp Unstable   Different Qualitative Results      Low Voltage     High Sheath Pressure   e Low Sheath Pressure     Command Timeout     Low Laser Power   e Cannot Calculate Inverse  Function     Failed Std in Batch             Standards Tab The Standards tab lists all the batch tests with system comments  specific to each test  The detailed test information that is displayed  on the three tabs of the Analysis window is determined by the test  selected under the Standards tab     The Standards tab displays the quantitative batch s standard curve  It  displays qualitative batches as a graph plot
229. t side of the Luminex 100 analyzer  Make the following  connections  refer to Figure B 11 as needed     e Connect the sheath fluid line  blue fitting  to the Sheath Out  connector on the front of the Luminex SD system     e Connect the air line  green fitting  to the Air In connector on  the front of the Luminex SD system     e If you are using the Luminex SD system waste line  connect  the waste line tubing to the waste connector on the left side  of the Luminex 100 analyzer  orange fitting   Place the other  end of the waste line into a large waste receptacle  Cut off  excess tubing  Ensure the waste receptacle is level with the  Luminex 100 analyzer or no more than three feet below it     e Connect the sheath fluid intake line  white fitting  to the  Sheath In connector on the front of the Luminex SD system         ooo ON    Luminex sp        SAR EEHHNEMN     EN SHEATH OUT       E SHEATH IN NE       7   1  Power and Fault indicators 5  Sheath Out connector  blue   2  Prime button 6  Sheath In connector  white   3  Regulator adjust 7  Reservoir window  4  Air In connector  green   Figure B 11 Luminex Sheath Delivery Device  B 11    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Note  Ensure that the sheath fluid  box is at least three feet below the  system  otherwise the Luminex SD  system will overfill     Note  The regulator must be fully  opened to work properly  It is  important to make sure that you  turn it as far as it will go     3     xMAP Technology    e Lower the sta
230. talled with your system     The kit manufacturer includes assay reagents in the assay kit  You  must provide information about these reagents  such as lot numbers  and concentration values for the standards and assay controls     A batch can include samples across more than one plate  When  setting up a batch  if the number of samples exceeds the wells in one  microtiter plate  another plate appears for additional samples  The  new plate appears to the immediate right of the existing plate image  on the screen with a dark line between the adjacent columns of the  two plates     During acquisition  the Run Batch tab displays the wells containing  the samples in the microtiter plate  Colors indicate the progress in  analyzing the samples  The following well colors indicate well   acquisition states     e Green well  with command number   sample not  acquired    e Yellow well  sample currently in acquisition   e Red well  sample failed  Check the system monitor for    more information    e Green background  with check mark   successfully completed    Common sample errors are due to lower number of events acquired  than established in the template     You need to import new templates to the system only once  You must  enter lot information for the standard and control reagents as  specified in the template  This lot information is used for every batch  setup using the template until it is changed     Templates include standards  controls  both standards and controls   maintenance
231. tch    Sample input can be done quickly with either the keyboard or a  barcode scanner  A batch can include as many samples as you have  for the assay and can include multiple microtiter plates  You can even  group multiple batches together into a multi batch for efficient  processing  You can process a batch immediately or choose to  archive the batch for testing later     As testing proceeds through the plate  you will see the display update    to show the wells that have been processed  Progress is shown in  both graphic and tabular form     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Basic Concepts    System calibrators and controls are provided as part of the system   Calibrate at least once monthly  when the delta calibration  dCAL   temperature changes by  3 degrees  or if the system is powered off  or moved  You must run system controls following calibration and as  often as you like to ensure that your system continues to operate  optimally     The software provides you with a variety of reports     e Analyte Reports provide batch results grouped by the test in a  batch    e Patient Summary reports provide batch results grouped by each  patient or unknown in a batch      Clinical Patient reports provide a breakdown of samples  according to the test analysis with that sample      Maintenance Reports provide a history of all maintenance  operations performed during a specified period of time      Calibration Trend reports provide result
232. te or local regulatory agencies and have not been tested by  Seller or Luminex for safety or efficacy in food  drug  medical device  cosmetic  commercial or any  other use  unless otherwise stated in Seller s technical specifications or material data sheets furnished  to Buyer  Buyer expressly represents and warrants to Seller that Buyer will properly test and use any  Product in accordance with the practices of a reasonable person who is an expert in the field and in  strict compliance with the United States Food and Drug Administration and all applicable domestic  and international laws and regulations  now and hereinafter enacted     BUYER HEREBY GRANTS TO LUMINEX A NONEXCLUSIVE  WORLDWIDE  UNRE   STRICTED  ROYALTY FREE  FULLY PAID UP LICENSE  WITH THE RIGHT TO GRANT AND          AUTHORIZE SUBLICENSES  UNDER ANY AND ALL PATENT RIGHTS IN INVENTIONS  COMPRISING MODIFICATIONS  EXTENSIONS  OR ENHANCEMENTS MADE BY BUYER  TO THE PRODUCT OR TO THE MANUFACTURE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT   IMPROVE   MENT PATENTS    TO MAKE  HAVE MADE  USE  IMPORT  OFFER FOR SALE OR SELL  ANY AND ALL PRODUCT  EXPLOIT ANY AND ALL METHODS OR PROCESSES  AND  OTHERWISE EXPLOIT IMPROVEMENT PATENTS FOR ALL PURPOSES  NOTWITHSTAND   ING THE FOREGOING   IMPROVEMENT PATENTS  SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDES PATENT  CLAIMS CONCEIVED AND REDUCED TO PRACTICE BY BUYER CONSISTING OF METH   ODS OF SAMPLE PREPARATION  METHODS OF CONJUGATING PRODUCT TO ANALYTES                            THE COMPOSITION OF MATTER OF THE SPECIFIC CHE
233. tem  Firmware Update    Update Firmware    Note  If you are directed by  Technical Support or by upgrade  kit instructions to upgrade to a  specific firmware version  then  click the Browse button and  select the desired firmware  version from the Open dialog box     Note  If you are upgrading the  Luminex XYP instrument firmware  consider doing it at this time  then  verify the Luminex 100 analyzer  and the Luminex XYP instrument  at the same time     Verify Successful  Firmware Upgrade    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Firmware Installation    If you are upgrading the firmware for more than one component  for  instance  the SD and the XYP   you must upgrade the SD system  first  Follow the steps in this section to update and verify the  Luminex SD system firmware     To update the Luminex SD system firmware     1  Close any open applications   2  Turn off the power to the SD  XYP  and LX100     3  Remove the serial cable from the Luminex XYP instrument and  plug it into P2 on the back of the SD system     4  Turn power back on to the SD system     5  Onthe PC desktop click  Start   Programs  Luminex   LXR  LX Firmware  The LX  Firmware Update Tool dialog box opens  See Figure B 19     6  Select the SD Device option button  Notice in the Movement  Device text box  item 3 in Figure B 19  that the top line displays  the current version of the Luminex SD system firmware and that  the second line displays its status     7  If the second line indicates that the f
234. the Prepare System for First Use  page B 26  before running  samples     New Luminex 100 IS 2 3 systems arrive with the Luminex 100 IS  2 3 software installed  Upgrading existing systems to Luminex 100  IS Version 2 3 requires that you upgrade your software through an  upgrade kit  The upgrade kits include necessary components  such as  software CDs  manuals  cables  and instructions     Select the upgrade kit that applies to your current version or is called  out in your upgrade kit procedure  If your current software version is     e Luminex 100 Version 1 7 with Windows 98 you need Upgrade  Kit CN U010 01  Follow the procedure on page B 15     e Luminex 100 Version 1 7 with Windows 2000 you need Upgrade  Kit CN U010 06  Follow the procedure on page B 17     e  Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 or 2 2 you need Upgrade Kit  U010 07  Follow the instructions on page B 19     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 Version 1 7  with Windows 98 to  Luminex 100 IS   Version 2 3    Install New PC    Install Luminex  100 IS 2 3  Software    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software Installation    Overview of upgrade to Luminex IS 2 3 software procedure          1     Install new PC  Install Luminex IS 2 3 software    Verify successful upgrade   To install the new PC     Close all applications  Perform a complete system shutdown   Turn the power off and unplug the Luminex 100 analyzer   Luminex XYP  and PC     Remove all connections from the old PC  Remov
235. the font as you select it  See Figure 5 49     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    Test 36 Customization    x             General   Axis   Font   Color   Style    Main Title    Arial    I bold   italic   underline    Sub Title      Times New Roman v    bold   italic    underline    Subset   Point   Axis Labels    Aral v    bold   italic     underline    sample  AaBbCc DdEeFfGg    Cancel   Apply   Original   Export     Maximize     Figure 5 49  Customization Dialog Box   Font Tab    Color Tab   Use the Color tab to define the various color  parameters on the analysis graph  See Figure 5 50     Desk Foreground  this is the color that is used when placing  text onto the Desk Background  It includes the main title  sub  title  subset point labels  grid numbers    Desk Background  this is the color that surrounds the bound   ing rectangle of the graph s grid  That is  the color of the bor   der that appears behind the text labeling    Shadow Color  the rectangles that make up the graph s grid  and table are bounded at the bottom right edges with shadows   To remove the shadows  choose the same color as the Desk  Background    Graph Foreground  this is the color used for the bounding  rectangles of the grid  the grid lines of the graph  and lines that  are used to bound some of the plotting methods  like the  bounding line around bars of the Bar Plotting Method    Graph Background  this is the color that is used as the back   ground color of the graph s gri
236. ting the assay standard   Above the graphical information  the tab displays the formula that it  used to calculate batch data  Below the graphical information  the tab  displays the Standards and Controls values for the selected test     5 24 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C       xMAP Technology    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software           E Analysis    inl xl  Open Batch   Export Data   Cos    Protein Batch IL 4    Errors  F9  Standards  F11    Samples  F12     Toana S Y    1 48E 02     2 85E 04    1      x   A85E  03    1 26E00     6 69E 01      ILA  E IL 6 R 2 0 9999  Sample HighiLow Logistis 5p  yza b H c PAYS                          EIL 8            R 2 0 9994  Sample High Low    Next Test  F2    Invalidate Standard  F4    invalidate Control  F6         a  F      Previous Test  F3    Validate Standard  F5    V  alidate Control  F7      chano Change Lot  Alt F8       Alphabetically  by Sample ID                                     o 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000  pgtL                                                             Loc Standard  Expected Conc MFI   TestResult CV     Unit a  ct 10 10 82 14 66  pgimL   D1 10 10 68 1511  paml   E1 315 31 6  212 27 70  pgimL   F1 316 316  208 2730  pgimL   G1 100 100  853 93 05  pain    Ht 100 100  833 90 84  pgimL   A2   316 316  2824 344 57  poimL E  Loc Control Expected Cone MFI  Low Limit High Limit Test Result CV Unit a  A3  Coni  00   100  797 75 125 86 89 pgimL   B3  Con100   100  815 75 125 88 86 pgimL   
237. tion  wait for the status to change   The communication cables are Remove and reconnect the cable  not connected  connections   Close the software application  and reopen it   Close the software application   then turn off the Luminex  system  Power on the system  and check the status   Refill Sheath Sheath fluid is low  Refill the sheath container  then  click Resume   Running  Sheath Empty Sheath fluid is empty  Replace or fill the sheath fluid    System Error  Messages    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    container with sheath fluid  Run  two Prime commands     There are two types of error messages  system error messages  and    sample error messages     System error messages are displayed in three places       the Message Log on the Diagnostics Tab      the message log located in the Windows message log folder      the Errors tab    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology       Error Message    Possible problem    Solution       Unknown Diagnostic Error    Unknown varied    Record the error code number  and message  Contact Luminex  Technical Support        XYP Instrument Heater  Stability Range Exceeded    The heater block temperature is  not hitting the target value        Low Voltage Detected    Possible laser failure     Turn off the analyzer  XYP  and  PC  then turn them back on   Calibrate and verify the system   If the error message occurs  again  contact Luminex  Technical Support        Runtime Sheath Pressure out  of Limits  Too High     The sheath 
238. tion in whole or in part is  strictly prohibited     Standard Terms and Conditions For Use of Product    By opening the packaging containing this product   Product   or by using such Product in any manner   you are consenting and agreeing to be bound by the following terms and conditions  You are also agree   ing that the following terms and conditions constitute a legally valid and binding contract that 1s enforce   able against you  If you do not agree to all of the terms and conditions set forth below  you must promptly  return the Product for a full refund prior to using them in any manner     l     Acceptance   ALL SALES ARE SUBJECT TO AND EXPRESSLY CONDITIONED UPON THE  TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED HEREIN  AND UPON BUYER S ASSENT  THERETO  NO VARIATION OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE BINDING  UPON LUMINEX CORPORATION   LUMINEX   UNLESS AGREED TO IN WRITING AND  SIGNED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF LUMINEX  For purposes of this agree   ment   Seller  shall mean the Luminex authorized reseller that sells the Product to Buyer  Buyer  by  accepting the Product shall be deemed to have assented to the terms and conditions set forth herein   notwithstanding any terms contained in any prior or later communications from Buyer and whether or  not Seller shall specifically or expressly object to any such terms                 Warranties   Any warranty obligations for the Product shall be exclusively provided in writing to  Buyer directly by Seller  LUMINEX MAKES NO W
239. ttle of calibrator  beads     Adjust the sample probe height   See page B 8     Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    There is a partial clog in the  system     There is air in the system     Possible problem with the laser     xMAP Technology    Clean the sample probe  See  page 6 4  Run 3 backflushes  3  drains  2 alcohol flushes  and 3  washes with distilled water     Run a prime and alcohol flush     View the calibration trend  report  Check for dramatic  changes in temperature  sheath  pressure  or voltages  If any of  these situations are evident on  the report  Contact Technical  Support        Zero events collected during  calibration     There is a problem with fluid  levels     Check the fluid levels in the  sheath and waste containers   Verify that both bottles are  tightly connected to the  instrument  Check that the waste  bottle cap is vented        Laser related issue     Verify fluid is moving through  the system by performing a  wash  A wash function will  cause fluid to go out to waste in  five distinctive spurts  If there s  not fluid going to waste  clean  the sample probe  see page 6 4    Run 3 backflushes  3 drains  2  alcohol flushes  and 3 washes  with distilled water  If the issue  does not resolve  contact  Technical Support        Analyzer fails Controls     The control microspheres are  not fully suspended     Wrong control lot number or  target values are entered in  Update CON Targets dialog  box     
240. tures and click Export  See Figure 5              47    x  m Esport       MetaFile  C BMP C Test   Data Only       Esport Destination      ClipBoard   C File   Browse    C Printer          Object Size    C No Specific Size    Milimeters    inches      Points EE  ancel    Width   5 177083   384375 Inches             Figure 5 47  Exporting Dialog Box  Maximize  Click to maximize the graph to full screen  Restore  to original size by pressing Escape on the keyboard or by click   ing in the title bar     Customization dialog box tabs     e General Tab   Use this tab to define general parameters  See  Figure 5 46     Main and Sub Titles  These edit boxes allow you to add  edit   or delete these titles  If no title is present  you can enter one   Delete all characters from a title to remove it    Viewing Style  The Graph supports three viewing styles   Color   Monochrome   Monochrome with Symbols   This customization allows you to quickly adjust the image to  best suit printing on a monochrome printer  If you include  fewer than four subsets in a graph  then the Monochrome set   ting will probably be the best choice  If four or more subsets    5 78 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    are included in the graph  then Monochrome with Symbols will  help distinguish the different subsets    Font Size  The Graph supports three font sizes  Large   Medium  and Small  When printing the graph  a font size of  Mediu
241. turning  off the power switch on the rear of the analyzer  then unplugging  the analyzer power cord from the wall source     Disconnect the sheath fluid tubing before changing the filter     Open the left door on the Luminex 100 analyzer  Disconnect the  filter by pushing down on the metal clamps on each connection   See Figure 6 7        Figure 6 7 Sheath Filter    Connect the new sheath filter  matching up the color coded  fittings  The arrow on the sheath filter should be pointing up     Reconnect the sheath fluid tubing   Plug in and power on the Luminex 100 analyzer   Close the left analyzer door     Prime twice     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology Maintenance and Cleaning    As required    Fuses    Danger  To avoid serious injury or death by electric shock     you must turn off the system and unplug it from the wall  outlet            To replace the fuses in either the Luminex 100 analyzer or the  Luminex XYP instrument     1  Turn off the power switch on the rear of the analyzer or  instrument  then unplug the instrument power cord from the wall  source  Remove the power cord from the analyzer or instrument     2  With a small  flathead screwdriver  open the module door on the  lower left corner of the back of the analyzer or instrument  See  Figure 6 8          P     Figure 6 8 Opening the Module Door  3  Remove the red cartridge  use a flathead screwdriver      4  Check both fuses for damage     5  Replace damaged fuses with the type specified on the stic
242. uirements     The first line of text in the file must be  L X100IS Patient List      The second line of text in the file must be     Accession   Dilution  Factor       Any following lines of text should be only in the format     x  y    Where x   accession ID number for the patient  patient identifier  string  and y   dilution factor    The dilution factor is optional  but if entered  must be a numeric  value    If the dilution factor is omitted  the system defaults to one     Patient list entries are case sensitive  This applies to entries made  through the graphical user interface or in a file     The format must be like the following example or it will not load  properly  Double check all Sample IDs before you save the newly  created batch     An example of a typical patient list file     LX100IS Patient List   Accession   Dilution Factor   a001 1   a002 2   a003 1   b001 4   b002 0 6   c917 4   cee4gf 1    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Edit a Patient List    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software        To add a Patient List file while creating a batch or multi batch     1  On the toolbar  click Create New Batch or Create New Multi   Batch  The Open Template dialog box opens     2  Selectatemplate to create a new batch and click Select  The  Luminex Batch Setup dialog box opens showing the template  commands and the microtiter plate representation  For multi   batches the Luminex Multi Batch Setup dialog box opens     3  Click Loa
243. us  close the  other application or wait until the  application completes           Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3 xMAP Technology    S econdary In addition to the main window  there are other windows that are   Windows displayed when you select certain commands  These are the Batch  Setup Window and Analysis Window  Additional windows display in  the Developer s Workbench software  if you have it installed on your  system  For more information about the Developer s Workbench  see  the Luminex Developer Workbench Guide for Version 2 3     Batch Setup Window In the Batch Setup window  you define information used to create  batches  All of the commands are on the same page  there are no  tabs  The window opens when you click New Batch and select a  template        Luminex Batch Setup P      Please establish the starting location for the batch and enter the appropriate patient information  Note    indicates a required field     Insert  Acquire Patient    x fi Apply                 Batch Info                                                                             gt  No  Location Command Sample ID Dil  Factor    Name   B 1 A1 Plate1  Acquire Standard  Std M 1 v   Batch erai 16 38 A 2 B1 Plate1  Acquire Standard  Std M 1 i   m 8 3 C1 Plate1  Acquire Standard  Std L 1 Finish  Description  Bj 4 D1 Plate1  Acquire Standard  StdL 1    None      amp  5 E1 Plate1 Acquire Standard  Std XL 1 X   amp  6 F1 Plate1 Acquire Standard  Std XL 1 Cancel  5  amp  7 G1 Plate1 Acquire Co
244. ut  In the auto selection mode  changes  automatically trigger the system to reanalyze the affected test  If you  are not using the auto mode  the ReCalc button is available after you  make a change such as changing a formula or lot  or invalidating or  validating a standard or control     Replays batch sample acquisition  All batch commands are replayed  allowing for batch acquisition viewing exactly as in real time  You  cannot replay New Advanced Batches  When running a Replay  Batch command  the original acquisition data is not altered  A new  file is created  The most common use is for system demonstration  and training     Enables the median fluorescence intensity  MFI  to appear on the  Analyte Report     Resumes the process that was paused     Raises and lowers the sample probe to adjust the probe height  This  adjustment is recommended when using different microtiter plates or  when changing sample probes     Uses the Luminex XYP reservoir due to volume requirement  The  sanitize command performs a similar function as the alcohol flush    Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    Save and Load    Save Only    Self Diagnostics    Show Bead    Single Step    Skip  wells     Soak    xMAP Technology    command  However  the sanitize command uses 10  to 20   household bleach to decontaminate sample lines and the cuvette after  biohazard contact     If selected  displays the run batch tab immediately after you set up  batch information and click Finish     Allows you to sa
245. ve the batch information  User can open the batch  later to acquire data     Performs a self diagnostics to see if the Luminex analyzer and all  system operations are functioning correctly  Self Diagnostics tests  these functions       Flash memory test     Microcontroller RAM test  Nonvolatile memory test    DSP program CRC test     DSP capture test      High voltage module     Channel backgrounds test    Pressurization test     Actuator test     Syringe pump test     Backflush valve test     Debubbler valve test    After selecting an entry from the drop down list  sets the histogram  to show events for only one beadset  bead set number     all gated    events within the gate  or   all   events inside and outside the gate   Select   all    default  before setting the gate     Selecting this option on the toolbar pauses the system in between  each command or sample acquisition within a batch     Enables you to deliberately bypass specific wells during batch  acquisition     Prevents salt crystals from forming in the probe due to air exposure   Soaking the probe replaces sheath fluid in the probe with water  You  should perform the soak function at the end of each day  The system  uses at least 250 uL of distilled water     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Start Analysis    Start  Plate     Statistics    Test Sort Orders    Validate Control    Validate Standard    View Batch Data    Warmup    Wash    Zoom    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 
246. x 100 IS Version 2 3 software update before  installing firmware upgrade tools and firmware files  See Luminex  100 IS 2 3 Software Installation  page B 14  for the procedure     There are two types of interface cable that connect between the  Luminex 100 analyzer and the PC  one is a serial cable and the other  is a USB cable     To upgrade from Luminex 100 Version 1 7  use the existing  serial interface cable  Then  replace with USB cable after the  upgrade     To upgrade from Luminex 100 IS Version 2 1 or 2 2  use the  existing USB cable     To upgrade the Luminex 100 analyzer firmware     1   2     Close any open applications     On the PC desktop click  Start   Programs  Luminex LXR   LX Firmware  The LX  Firmware Update Tool dialog box opens  See Figure B 19     Notice in the Detector Device text box  item 2 in Figure B 19   that the top line displays the current firmware version and the  second line displays the firmware status  That is  either an update  is available or the firmware is up to date  See note     If the second line indicates that the firmware is up to date  then    click Close  No further action is required  If an update version is  available  then continue with step 4     PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Firmware Installation                         Note  If you are directed by   LxFirmware Update Tool  x   Technical Support or by Welcome to the LxFirmware update tool   upg rade kit instr uctions to If any upgrades are 
247. y after calibration and after sanitizing  Place at least  200 mL in a microtiter well or fill the Luminex XYP reservoir with  distilled water         To perform a Wash command        Onthe Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract     2  Click Wash  A confirmation dialog box opens telling you to  place solution in the reservoir     3  Putdistilled water in the reservoir     4  Click OK  The plate holder retracts  and the system performs the  Wash command     5 96 PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    xMAP Technology    Perform a Soak  Command    Exit Luminex IS  2 3 Software    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Using Luminex 100 IS 2 3 Software    Soak the sample probe to prevent the sheath fluid crystals from  forming in the sample probe         To perform a soak command   1  On the Maintenance tab  click Eject Retract     2  Select Reservoir from the dropdown menu next to the Soak  button  then click Soak  A confirmation dialog box opens telling  you to place solution in the reservoir     3  Putdistilled water in the reservoir     4  Click OK  The plate holder retracts  and the system performs the  Soak command     When you exit the system a confirmation dialog box prompts you to  verify that you really want to exit the system         To exit the system   On the File menu  click Exit  then click Yes     Luminex 100 IS User Manual Version 2 3    xMAP Technology    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C    Maintenance and Cleaning    Daily Maintenance    Before Running Samples    PN 89 00002 00 071 Rev  C  
248. y remaining  patient IDs to the end of the  command list in the order as they  appear in the patient list     xMAP Technology    5  If you want to insert an Acquire Patient or Skip command  select  the command from the Insert menu  In the multiplier box  enter  the number of patients that you want to add to the list or the  number of wells that you want to skip and click Apply  Skipped  wells and patient wells added to the batch are shown as green  wells on the microtiter plate image     6  If you are running a maintenance template  add any samples  for  processing   Then click Save and Load  default  or Save Only   Otherwise  continue with step 7     7  Ifyou want to change the well location where you begin  acquiring samples  drag the highlighted starting well  default is  A1  to the desired location on the microtiter plate     8  Click the field in the Sample ID row that represents the last  empty well on the microtiter plate     9  Enter the sample ID for the sample to add  Repeat this step to  add all of the additional samples to the batch  You can enter the  sample manually  through a patient list  or using the system  barcode reader  Batches may span more than one plate  When the  first plate is full  a blue line separates the columns of the first  plate with those of a second plate  To add a sample ID to the end  of the list  press the Enter key or double click in the last line     10  To add a patient file to the batch  click Load Pa List  An Open  Patient List File 
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
AquaClean Manual    Manual usuario Chipeadora Patriot    BETRIEBSANLEITUNG - Hürner  SEDNA USB Wireless LAN Adapter User Manual  Western Digital My Passport Studio  Release Notes WPP 551 - Honeywell Access Systems  肺血管拡張剤(吸入用ガス) 一酸化窒素 【禁忌】(次の  M600 P Détecteur portable de contrebande    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file